Toshiba Air Conditioner Rav Sm564sdt E User Manual

FILE NO. A08-007  
SERVICE MANUAL  
AIR-CONDITIONER  
SPLIT TYPE  
INDOOR UNIT  
<DIGITAL INVERTER>  
RAV-SM404SDT-E  
RAV-SM454SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
OUTDOOR UNIT  
<SUPER DIGITAL INVERTER>  
RAV-SP404AT-E RAV-SP454AT-E  
RAV-SP404ATZ-E RAV-SP454ATZ-E  
RAV-SP404ATZG-E RAV-SP454ATZG-E  
RAV-SP564AT-E RAV-SP804AT-E  
RAV-SP564ATZ-E RAV-SP804ATZ-E  
RAV-SP564ATZG-E RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
R410A  
PRINTED IN JAPAN, Jan., 2009 ToMo  
7. REFRIGERANT R410A ............................................................................ 33  
7-1. Safety During Installation/Servicing ............................................................... 33  
7-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation....................................................................... 33  
7-3. Tools .................................................................................................................. 37  
7-4. Recharging of Refrigerant................................................................................ 37  
7-5. Brazing of Pipes................................................................................................ 38  
7-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping of R22 or R407C ............................................ 40  
8. INDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT (SLIM DUCTTYPE) ................................. 43  
8-1. Indoor Controller Block Diagram..................................................................... 43  
8-2. Indoor Controls (Slim DuctType) .................................................................... 46  
8-3. Optional Connector Specifications of Indoor P.C. Board .............................. 55  
8-4. Indoor Print Circuit Board ................................................................................ 56  
9. OUTDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT.............................................................. 57  
9-1. Outdoor Controls .............................................................................................. 57  
9-2. Outdoor Print Circuit Board ............................................................................. 68  
10. TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................. 70  
10-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting........................................................................... 70  
10-2. Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 72  
11. REPLACEMENT OF SERVICE P.C. BOARD.......................................... 107  
11-1. Indoort Unit (Slim DuctType)......................................................................... 107  
12. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS ................................................ 112  
12-1. Indoor Unit (Slim DuctType) .......................................................................... 112  
12-2. Setup at Local Site / Others ........................................................................... 119  
12-3. How to Set up Central Control Address Number ......................................... 121  
12-4. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 126  
13. ADDRESS SETUP.................................................................................. 134  
13-1. Address Setup Procedure.............................................................................. 134  
13-2. Address Setup & Group Control.................................................................... 135  
13-3. Remote Controller Wiring............................................................................... 138  
13-4. Address Setup (Manual setting from remote controller)............................. 139  
13-5. Confirmation of Indoor Unit No. Position ..................................................... 140  
14. DETACHMENTS ..................................................................................... 142  
14-1. Indoor Unit...................................................................................................... 142  
14-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 147  
15. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST .................................................. 164  
15-1. Indoor Unit....................................................................................................... 164  
15-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 167  
3 –  
SAFETY CAUTION  
The important contents concerned to the safety are described on the product itself and on this Service Manual.  
Please read this Service Manual after understanding the described items thoroughly in the following contents  
(Indications/Illustrated marks), and keep them.  
[Explanation of indications]  
Indication  
Explanation  
Indicates contents assumed that an imminent danger causing a death or serious injury of  
the repair engineers and the third parties when an incorrect work has been executed.  
DANGER  
Indicates possibilities assumed that a danger causing a death or serious injury of the  
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work  
when an incorrect work has been executed.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Indicates contents assumed that an injury or property damage () may be caused on the  
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work  
when an incorrect work has been executed.  
Property damage : Enlarged damage concerned to property, furniture, and domestic animal/pet  
[Explanation of illustrated marks]  
Mark  
Explanation  
Indicates prohibited items (Forbidden items to do)  
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete prohibited contents.  
Indicates mandatory items (Compulsory items to do)  
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete mandatory contents.  
Indicates cautions (Including danger/warning)  
The sentences or illustration near or in an illustrated mark describe the concrete cautious contents.  
[Confirmation of warning label on the main unit]  
Confirm that labels are indicated on the specified positions  
(Refer to the Parts disassembly diagram (Outdoor unit).)  
If removing the label during parts replace, stick it as the original.  
DANGER  
Turn “OFF” the breaker before removing the front panel and cabinet, otherwise an electric  
shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
During operation, a high voltage with 400V or higher of circuit () at secondary circuit of the  
high-voltage transformer is applied.  
If touching a high voltage with the naked hands or body, an electric shock is caused even if using an  
electric insulator.  
Turn off breaker.  
Execute discharge  
: For details, refer to the electric wiring diagram.  
When removing the front panel or cabinet, execute short-circuit and discharge between  
high-voltage capacitor terminals.  
If discharge is not executed, an electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
between terminals. After turning off the breaker, high voltage also keeps to apply to the high-voltage capacitor.  
Do not turn on the breaker under condition that the front panel and cabinet are removed.  
An electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
Prohibition  
– 4 –  
WARNING  
Before troubleshooting or repair work, check the earth wire is connected to the earth  
terminals of the main unit, otherwise an electric shock is caused when a leak occurs.  
If the earth wire is not correctly connected, contact an electric engineer for rework.  
Check earth wires.  
Prohibition of modification.  
Use specified parts.  
Do not modify the products.  
Do not also disassemble or modify the parts. It may cause a fire, electric shock or injury.  
For spare parts, use those specified ().  
If unspecified parts are used, a fire or electric shock may be caused.  
: For details, refer to the parts list.  
Before troubleshooting or repair work, do not bring a third party (a child, etc.) except  
the repair engineers close to the equipment.  
It causes an injury with tools or disassembled parts.  
Do not bring a child  
close to the equipment.  
Please inform the users so that the third party (a child, etc.) does not approach the equipment.  
Connect the cut-off lead wires with crimp contact, etc, put the closed end side  
upward and then apply a water-cut method, otherwise a leak or production of fire is  
caused at the users’ side.  
Insulating measures  
When repairing the refrigerating cycle, take the following measures.  
1) Be attentive to fire around the cycle. When using a gas stove, etc, be sure to put out fire  
before work; otherwise the oil mixed with refrigerant gas may catch fire.  
2) Do not use a welder in the closed room.  
No fire  
When using it without ventilation, carbon monoxide poisoning may be caused.  
3) Do not bring inflammables close to the refrigerant cycle, otherwise fire of the welder may  
catch the inflammables.  
Check the used refrigerant name and use tools and materials of the parts which  
match with it.  
For the products which use R410A refrigerant, the refrigerant name is indicated at a  
position on the outdoor unit where is easy to see. To prevent miss-charging, the route of the  
service port is changed from one of the former R22.  
For an air conditioner which uses R410A, never use other refrigerant than R410A.  
For an air conditioner which uses other refrigerant (R22, etc.), never use R410A.  
If different types of refrigerant are mixed, abnormal high pressure generates in the  
refrigerating cycle and an injury due to breakage may be caused.  
Do not charge refrigerant additionally.  
If charging refrigerant additionally when refrigerant gas leaks, the refrigerant composition in  
the refrigerating cycle changes resulted in change of air conditioner characteristics or  
refrigerant over the specified standard amount is charged and an abnormal high pressure is  
applied to the inside of the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of breakage or injury.  
Therefore if the refrigerant gas leaks, recover the refrigerant in the air conditioner, execute  
vacuuming, and then newly recharge the specified amount of liquid refrigerant.  
In this time, never charge the refrigerant over the specified amount.  
Refrigerant  
When recharging the refrigerant in the refrigerating cycle, do not mix the refrigerant  
or air other than R410A into the specified refrigerant.  
If air or others is mixed with the refrigerant, abnormal high pressure generates in the  
refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of injury due to breakage.  
After installation work, check the refrigerant gas does not leak.  
If the refrigerant gas leaks in the room, poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire  
such as fan heater, stove or cocking stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.  
Never recover the refrigerant into the outdoor unit.  
When the equipment is moved or repaired, be sure to recover the refrigerant with  
recovering device. The refrigerant cannot be recovered in the outdoor unit; otherwise a  
serious accident such as breakage or injury is caused.  
After repair work, surely assemble the disassembled parts, and connect and lead the  
removed wires as before. Perform the work so that the cabinet or panel does not  
catch the inner wires.  
If incorrect assembly or incorrect wire connection was done, a disaster such as a leak or  
fire is caused at user’s side.  
Assembly/Cabling  
– 5 –  
WARNING  
After the work has finished, be sure to use an insulation tester set (500V Megger) to  
check the resistance is 2Mor more between the charge section and the non-charge  
metal section (Earth position).  
If the resistance value is low, a disaster such as a leak or electric shock is caused at user’s  
side.  
Insulator check  
Ventilation  
When the refrigerant gas leaks during work, execute ventilation.  
If the refrigerant gas touches to a fire, poisonous gas generates.  
A case of leakage of the refrigerant and the closed room full with gas is dangerous because  
a shortage of oxygen occurs. Be sure to execute ventilation.  
When checking the circuit inevitably under condition of the power-ON, use rubber  
gloves and others not to touch to the charging section.  
If touching to the charging section, an electric shock may be caused.  
Be attentive to  
electric shock  
When the refrigerant gas leaks, find up the leaked position and repair it surely.  
If the leaked position cannot be found up and the repair work is interrupted, pump-down  
and tighten the service valve, otherwise the refrigerant gas may leak into the room.  
The poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire such as fan heater, stove or cocking  
stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.  
When installing equipment which includes a large amount of charged refrigerant  
such as a multi air conditioner in a sub-room, it is necessary that the density does  
not the limit even if the refrigerant leaks.  
Compulsion  
If the refrigerant leaks and exceeds the limit density, an accident of shortage of oxygen is  
caused.  
For the installation/moving/reinstallation work, follow to the Installation Manual.  
If an incorrect installation is done, a trouble of the refrigerating cycle, water leak, electric  
shock or fire is caused.  
After repair work has finished, check there is no trouble.  
If check is not executed, a fire, electric shock or injury may be caused.  
For a check, turn off the power breaker.  
Check after repair  
After repair work (installation of front panel and cabinet) has finished, execute a test  
run to check there is no generation of smoke or abnormal sound.  
If check is not executed, a fire or an electric shock is caused.  
Before test run, install the front panel and cabinet.  
Check the following items after reinstallation.  
Check after reinstallation  
1) The earth wire is correctly connected.  
2) The power cord is not caught in the product.  
3) There is no inclination or unsteadiness and the installation is stable.  
If check is not executed, a fire, an electric shock or an injury is caused.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to put on the gloves () and a long sleeved shirt:  
otherwise an injury may be caused with the parts, etc.  
() Heavy gloves such as work gloves  
Put on gloves  
Cooling check  
When the power was turned on, start to work after the equipment has been  
sufficiently cooled.  
As temperature of the compressor pipes and others became high due to cooling/heating  
operation, a burn may be caused.  
– 6 –  
• New Refrigerant (R410A)  
This air conditioner adopts a new HFC type refrigerant (R410A) which does not deplete the ozone layer.  
1. Safety Caution Concerned to New Refrigerant  
The pressure of R410A is high 1.6 times of that of the former refrigerant (R22).  
Accompanied with change of refrigerant, the refrigerating oil has been also changed.  
Therefore, be sure that water, dust, the former refrigerant or the former refrigerating oil is not mixed into the  
refrigerating cycle of the air conditioner with new refrigerant during installation work or service work.  
If an incorrect work or incorrect service is performed, there is a possibility to cause a serious accident.  
Use the tools and materials exclusive to R410A to purpose a safe work.  
2. Cautions on Installation/Service  
1) Do not mix the other refrigerant or refrigerating oil.  
For the tools exclusive to R410A, shapes of all the joints including the service port differ from those of  
the former refrigerant in order to prevent mixture of them.  
2) As the use pressure of the new refrigerant is high, use material thickness of the pipe and tools which are  
specified for R410A.  
3) In the installation time, use clean pipe materials and work with great attention so that water and others do  
not mix in because pipes are affected by impurities such as water, oxide scales, oil, etc.  
Use the clean pipes.  
Be sure to brazing with flowing nitrogen gas. (Never use gas other than nitrogen gas.)  
4) For the earth protection, use a vacuum pump for air purge.  
5) R410A refrigerant is azeotropic mixture type refrigerant.  
Therefore use liquid type to charge the refrigerant. (If using gas for charging, composition of the  
refrigerant changes and then characteristics of the air conditioner change.)  
3. Pipe Materials  
For the refrigerant pipes, copper pipe and joints are mainly used.  
It is necessary to select the most appropriate pipes to conform to the standard.  
Use clean material in which impurities adhere inside of pipe or joint to a minimum.  
1) Copper pipe  
<Piping>  
The pipe thickness, flare finishing size, flare nut and others differ according to a refrigerant type.  
When using a long copper pipe for R410A, it is recommended to select “Copper or copper-base pipe  
without seam” and one with bonded oil amount 40mg/10m or less.  
Also do not use crushed, deformed, discolored (especially inside) pipes.  
(Impurities cause clogging of expansion valves and capillary tubes.)  
<Flare nut>  
Use the flare nuts which are attached to the air conditioner unit.  
2) Joint  
The flare joint and socket joint are used for joints of the copper pipe.  
The joints are rarely used for installation of the air conditioner. However clear impurities when using them.  
– 7 –  
4. Tools  
1. Required Tools for R410A  
Mixing of different types of oil may cause a trouble such as generation of sludge, clogging of capillary,  
etc. Accordingly, the tools to be used are classified into the following three types.  
1) Tools exclusive for R410A (Those which cannot be used for conventional refrigerant (R22))  
2) Tools exclusive for R410A, but can be also used for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
3) Tools commonly used for R410A and for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
The table below shows the tools exclusive for R410A and their interchangeability.  
Tools exclusive for R410A (The following tools for R410A are required.)  
Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability  
R410A  
Conventional air  
air conditioner installation  
conditioner installation  
No.  
Used tool  
Usage  
Existence of  
new equipment  
for R410A  
Whether conventional  
Whether conventional  
equipment can be used  
equipment  
can be used  
Flare tool  
Pipe flaring  
Yes  
Yes  
Ye s  
Ye s  
*(Note)  
*(Note)  
N o  
Ye s  
*(Note)  
No  

Copper pipe gauge  
for adjusting  
projection margin  
Flaring by conventional  
flare tool  
Torque wrench  
Gauge manifold  
Charge hose  
Tightening of flare nut  
ƒ
Evacuating, refrigerant  
charge, run check, etc.  
N o  
No  
Vacuum pump adapter Vacuum evacuating  
Electronic balance for  
Ye s  
Ye s  
Ye s  
N o  
Ye s  
N o  
Ye s  
Ye s  
Ye s  
ˆ
Refrigerant charge  
refrigerant charging  
Leakage detector  
Gas leakage check  
(Note) When flaring is carried out for R410A using the conventional flare tools, adjustment of projection  
margin is necessary. For this adjustment, a copper pipe gauge, etc. are necessary.  
General tools (Conventional tools can be used.)  
In addition to the above exclusive tools, the following equipments which serve also for R22 are necessary  
as the general tools.  
1) Vacuum pump. Use vacuum pump by  
attaching vacuum pump adapter.  
2) Torque wrench  
3) Pipe cutter  
7) Screwdriver (+, –)  
8) Spanner or Monkey wrench  
9) Hole core drill  
4) Reamer  
10) Hexagon wrench (Opposite side 4mm)  
11) Tape measure  
5) Pipe bender  
6) Level vial  
12) Metal saw  
Also prepare the following equipments for other installation method and run check.  
1) Clamp meter  
2) Thermometer  
3) Insulation resistance tester (Megger)  
4) Electroscope  
– 8 –  
1. SPECIFICATIONS  
1-1. Indoor Unit  
1-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
Model  
RAV-SM564UT-E  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
5.3  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.82 – 6.25  
8.72 – 7.99  
1.47  
98  
1.86  
97  
Cooling  
Heating  
Power factor  
EER  
3.61  
A
3.82  
A
Energy efficiency class  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
5.61 – 5.14  
1.21  
98  
8.95 – 8.20  
1.91  
97  
COP  
4.63  
A
4.19  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
Main unit  
(A)  
13.30  
20.30  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
Appearance  
Model  
RBC-U31PG (W, WS)-E, RBC-U31PGS (W, WS)-E  
(W) : 2.5GY 9.0/0.5, (WS) : 2.5GY 9.0/0.5, 8B3/0.3  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Panel color  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
256  
840  
840  
30  
256  
840  
840  
30  
Main unit  
Outer  
dimension  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
950  
950  
20  
950  
950  
20  
Main unit  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)  
(kg)  
4.2  
4.2  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Turbo fan  
Fan  
Fan unit  
Air filter  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
17.5 / 14.5 / 13.0  
14  
20.5 / 16.0 / 13.5  
20  
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)  
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,  
AX31U (W, WS)-E, TCB-AX21E2  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
32 / 29 / 28  
47 / 44 / 43  
12.7  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
15.9  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
6.4  
9.5  
(mm)  
VP25  
: IEC standard  
– 9 –  
1-1-2. Concealed DuctType  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
Model  
RAV-SM562BT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
5.0  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.24 – 6.63  
10.36 – 9.49  
1.56  
98  
2.21  
Cooling  
97  
EER  
3.21  
A
3.21  
Energy efficiency class*  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
10.36 – 9.49  
2.21  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.19 – 6.59  
1.55  
98  
Heating  
97  
COP  
3.61  
A
3.62  
Energy efficiency class *  
A
Maximum current  
(A)  
13.60  
20.60  
Appearance  
Main unit  
Main unit  
Main unit  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
320  
700  
800  
30  
320  
1000  
800  
39  
Outer  
dimension  
Total weight  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Centrifugal  
Fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
13.0 / 11.9 / 9.8  
120  
19.0 / 16.2 / 13.3  
120  
TCB-UFM21BE  
TCB-UFH61BE  
TCB-UFM21BFCE  
TCB-UFH61BFCE  
TCB-UFM31BE  
TCB-UFH71BE  
TCB-UFM21BFCE  
TCB-UFH61BFCE  
Air filter (Sold separately)  
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,  
TCB-AX21E2  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
40 / 37 / 33  
55 / 52 / 48  
12.7  
40 / 37 / 34  
55 / 52 / 49  
15.9  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
6.4  
9.5  
(mm)  
VP25  
: IEC standard  
– 10 –  
1-1-3. Under CeilingType  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
Model  
RAV-SM562CT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
5.0  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.24 – 6.63  
10.36 – 9.49  
1.56  
98  
2.21  
Cooling  
97  
EER  
3.21  
A
3.21  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
10.12 – 9.28  
2.16  
Electrical  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.82 – 6.25  
1.47  
98  
characteristics  
Heating  
97  
COP  
3.81  
A
3.70  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
Maximum current  
(A)  
13.50  
20.50  
Appearance  
Main unit  
Main unit  
Main unit  
Fan  
Shine white  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
210  
910  
680  
21  
210  
1180  
680  
25  
Outer  
dimension  
Total weight  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Centrifugal  
Fan unit  
Air filter  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
13.0 / 11.2 / 10.0  
60  
18.5 / 16.7 / 14.6  
60  
Attached main unit  
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,  
TCB-AX21E2, AX22CE2  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
36 / 33 / 30  
51 / 48 / 45  
12.7  
38 / 36 / 33  
53 / 51 / 48  
15.9  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
6.4  
9.5  
(mm)  
VP25  
: IEC standard  
– 11 –  
1-1-4. High WallType  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
Model  
RAV-SM562KRT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
5.0  
5.6  
6.9  
8.0  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.24 – 6.63  
11.25 – 10.31  
1.56  
98  
2.40  
Cooling  
97  
EER  
3.21  
A
2.88  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
C
Electrical  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.19 – 6.59  
1.55  
98  
11.25 – 10.31  
characteristics  
2.40  
97  
Heating  
COP  
3.61  
A
3.33  
C
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
(A)  
13.40  
20.40  
Appearance  
Main unit  
Main unit  
Main unit  
Fan  
Pure white  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
298  
998  
221  
12  
298  
998  
221  
12  
Outer  
dimension  
Total weight  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Cross flow fan  
Fan unit  
Air filter  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
14.0 / 12.5 / 10.7  
30  
18.5 / 14.6 / 12.2  
30  
Attached main unit  
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,  
TCB-AX21E2  
Controller (Sold separately)  
(FCU comes with WH-H2UE)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
39 / 36 / 33  
54 / 51 / 48  
12.7  
45 / 41 / 36  
60 / 56 / 51  
15.9  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
6.4  
9.5  
(mm)  
VP16  
: IEC standard  
– 12 –  
1-1-5. Compact 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType (600 × 600)  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
RAV-SM  
402MUT-E  
452MUT-E  
562MUT-E  
Model  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP 404AT(Z)(ZG)-E 454AT(Z)(ZG)-E 564AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
3.6  
4.0  
4.0  
5.0  
5.6  
4.5  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
5.05 – 4.63  
5.82 – 5.33  
7.24 – 6.63  
1.00  
1.19  
1.56  
98  
Cooling  
90  
93  
EER  
3.60  
3.36  
3.21  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
A
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
4.79 – 4.39  
5.67 – 5.20  
7.14 – 6.55  
1.54  
98  
0.97  
92  
1.16  
Heating  
93  
COP  
4.12  
A
3.88  
3.64  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
Maximum current  
Main unit  
(A)  
13.60  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
RBC-UM11PG (W)-E  
Appearance  
Model  
Panel color  
Height  
Width  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Moon-white (Muncel 2.5GY 9.0/0.5)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
268  
Main unit  
575  
Depth  
575  
Outer  
dimension  
Height  
Width  
27  
700  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Depth  
700  
Main unit  
17  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)  
(kg)  
3
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Turbo fan  
Fan  
Fan unit  
Air filter  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
11.0 / 9.2 / 7.8  
13.3 / 11.2 / 9.1  
60  
Long life filter  
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,  
TCB-AX21E2  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
40 / 36 / 31  
55 / 51 / 46  
43 / 39 / 34  
58 / 54 / 49  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
12.7  
6.4  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
(mm)  
VP25  
: IEC standard  
– 13 –  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SM402MUT-E  
RAV-SM402MUT-E  
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
7.1  
Model  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
(kW)  
(kW)  
8.0  
Indoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
EER  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
10.36 – 9.49  
2.21  
Cooling  
97  
3.21  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
10.12 – 9.28  
2.16  
Heating  
Fan  
97  
COP  
3.70  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
Turbo fan  
11.0 / 9.2 / 7.8  
60  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
40 / 36 / 31  
55 / 51 / 46  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Standard length  
(m)  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
5
Min. length  
Max. total length  
50  
Refrigerant  
pipe  
Refrigerant charging amount  
(Charge-less up to 30m)  
40g/m  
(31m to 50m)  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
Height  
difference  
Fan  
Propeller fan  
50  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow volume  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
63  
Main  
(mm)  
15.9  
Gas side  
Sub  
(mm)  
12.7  
Connecting  
pipe  
Main  
(mm)  
9.5  
Liquid side  
Sub  
(mm)  
6.4  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
48 / 49  
64 / 65  
: IEC standard  
– 14 –  
1-1-6. Slim DuctType  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
RAV-SM  
404SDT-E  
454SDT-E  
564SDT-E  
Model  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
RAV-SP 404AT(Z)(ZG)-E 454AT(Z)(ZG)-E 564AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
(kW)  
(kW)  
3.6  
4.0  
4.0  
5.0  
5.6  
Heating capacity  
4.5  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
5.20 – 4.77  
5.87 – 5.38  
7.24 – 6.63  
1.03  
90  
1.20  
1.56  
98  
Cooling  
93  
EER  
3.50  
A
3.33  
3.21  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
Electrical  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
4.94 – 4.53  
1.00  
92  
5.62 – 5.15  
6.68 – 6.12  
1.44  
98  
characteristics  
1.15  
Heating  
93  
COP  
4.00  
A
3.91  
3.89  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
Maximum current  
(A)  
15.00  
15.00  
13.60  
Appearance  
Main unit  
Main unit  
Main unit  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
210  
845  
Outer  
dimension  
645  
Total weight  
22  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Centrifugal  
Fan  
Fan unit  
Air filter  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
11.5 / 10.0 / 8.7  
13.0 / 11.3 / 9.7  
60  
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)  
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,  
TCB-AX21E2  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Under air inlet  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
39 / 36 / 33  
30 / 28 / 26  
54 / 51 / 48  
45 / 43 / 41  
45 / 40 / 36  
33 / 31 / 28  
60 / 55 / 51  
48 / 46 / 43  
Sound  
pressure level  
Back air inlet  
Under air inlet  
Back air inlet  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
Sound  
power level  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
12.7  
6.4  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
(mm)  
VP25  
: IEC standard  
– 15 –  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SM404SDT-E  
RAV-SM404SDT-E  
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
7.1  
Model  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
(kW)  
(kW)  
8.0  
Indoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
EER  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
10.36 – 9.49  
2.21  
Cooling  
97  
3.21  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
10.12 – 9.28  
2.16  
Heating  
Fan  
97  
COP  
3.70  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
Centrifugal  
11.5 / 10.0 / 8.7  
60  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Under air inlet  
Back air inlet  
Under air inlet  
Back air inlet  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
39 / 36 / 33  
30 / 28 / 26  
54 / 51 / 48  
45 / 43 / 41  
Sound  
pressure level  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Sound  
power level  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Standard length  
Min. length  
(m)  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
5
Max. total length  
50  
Refrigerant  
pipe  
Refrigerant charging amount  
(Charge-less up to 30m)  
40g/m  
(31m to 50m)  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
Height  
difference  
Fan  
Propeller fan  
50  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow volume  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
63  
Main  
(mm)  
15.9  
Gas side  
Sub  
(mm)  
12.7  
Connecting  
pipe  
Main  
(mm)  
9.5  
Liquid side  
Sub  
(mm)  
6.4  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
48 / 49  
64 / 65  
: IEC standard  
– 16 –  
1-2. Outdoor Unit  
<Super Digital Inverter>  
Model name  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP 404AT(Z)(ZG)-E 454AT(Z)(ZG)-E 564AT(Z)(ZG)-E 804AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
(Power exclusive to outdoor is required.)  
Power supply  
Type  
Hermetic compressor  
Compressor Motor  
Pole  
(kW)  
(kg)  
1.1  
4
1.1  
4
1.1  
4
2.0  
4
Refrigerant charged  
Refrigerant control  
1.0  
1.0  
1.4  
2.1  
Pulse motor valve  
Standard length  
(m)  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
5
7.5  
5
7.5  
5
7.5  
5
Min. length  
Max. total length  
30  
30  
50  
50  
Inter  
connecting  
pipe  
Additional refrigerant charge  
under long piping connector  
20g/m  
(21m to 30m)  
20g/m  
(21m to 30m)  
20g/m  
(21m to 50m)  
40g/m  
(31m to 50m)  
Outdoor lower  
Height  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
difference  
Outdoor higher  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
550  
780  
290  
550  
780  
290  
550  
780  
290  
890  
900  
320  
Outer  
dimension  
Appearance  
Total weight  
Silky shade (Muncel 1Y 8.5/0.5)  
(kg)  
40  
40  
44  
63  
Heat exchanger  
Fan  
Finned tube  
Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
40  
43  
40  
43  
40  
43  
50  
63  
Gas side  
(mm)  
12.7  
6.4  
12.7  
6.4  
12.7  
6.4  
15.9  
9.5  
Connecting  
pipe  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating (dB•A)  
Cooling/Heating (dB•A)  
45 / 47  
62 / 64  
45 / 47  
62 / 64  
47 / 48  
63 / 64  
48 / 49  
64 / 65  
Outside air temperature, Cooling  
Outside air temperature, Heating  
(°C)  
(°C)  
43 to – 15°C  
15 to – 15°C  
15 to – 20°C  
– 17 –  
1-3. Operation Characteristic Curve  
• Operation characteristic curve <Super Digital Inverter>  
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
10  
9
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
RAV-SM5562BT, CCT, KRT,, MUT-E,  
RAV-SM5564SDT-E  
RAV-SM5562BT, CCT, KRT,, MUT-E,  
RAV-SM5564SDT-E  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
RAV-SM5564UT-E  
RAV-SM5564UT-E  
4
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB20˚C  
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C  
Outdoor : DB35˚C  
Air flow : High  
2
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
0
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120  
Compressor speed (rps)  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
Compressor speed (rps)  
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
22  
20  
13  
12  
11  
18  
16  
RAV-SSM802BBT, CT,, KRT-E  
RAV-SM802BT, CT, KRT-E  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14  
12  
10  
8
RAV-SM8804UT-E  
RAV-SM8804UT-E  
6
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB20˚C  
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C  
Outdoor : DB35˚C  
Air flow : High  
4
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
2
0
0
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120  
Compressor speed (rps)  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
Compressor speed (rps)  
– 18 –  
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E  
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
14  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
12  
10  
8
SP45  
SP45  
SP40  
6
6
SP40  
4
4
Conditions  
Conditions  
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C  
Outdoor : DB35˚C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
Indoor : DB20˚C  
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C  
Air flow : High  
2
2
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
0
0
0
20  
40 50 60 70 80 90 100  
0
20  
40  
60  
80 90 100  
120  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Compressor speed (rps)  
• Capacity variation ratio according to temperature  
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E  
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E  
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E  
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
105  
120  
110  
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
100  
95  
90  
85  
80  
75  
70  
65  
60  
55  
50  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Indoor : DB20˚C  
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43  
-20 -18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2  
0
2
4
6
8 10  
Outdoor temp. (˚C)  
Outdoor temp. (˚C)  
– 19 –  
2. CONSTRUCTION VIEWS (EXTERNAL VIEWS)  
2-1. Indoor Unit  
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E  
845  
21  
803 (inside)  
21  
Refrigerant piping  
103  
Air filter  
31  
805  
910  
59  
80  
33  
163  
Fresh air inlet  
(knock-out hole)  
Drain-up port  
Hung-up plate  
– 20 –  
2-2. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SP404AT(Z)(ZG)-E, RAV-SP454AT(Z)(ZG)-E, RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Drain hole  
(2-Ø20 × 88 long hole)  
Drain hole (Ø25)  
600  
90  
54  
2-Ø11-14 U-shape hole  
(For Ø8-Ø10 anchor bolts)  
A legs  
108 125  
Connecting pipe port  
(Gas flare side: Ø12.7)  
Connecting pipe port  
(Liquid flare side: Ø6.4)  
30  
8-Ø6 hole  
(For fixing outdoor unit)  
B legs  
2-Ø11 × L14 long hole  
(For Ø8-Ø10 anchor bolts)  
483  
108  
257  
157  
79  
69.5  
147  
145  
143  
25  
22  
31  
32  
500  
71  
342  
780  
Earth  
terminal  
Charge port  
Discharge guard  
Discharge guide mounting hole  
(4-Ø4.5 embossing)  
Space required for service  
600  
2-Ø11 × 14 U-shape holes  
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)  
Suction port  
300  
or more  
150  
or more  
Discharge  
port  
(Minimum  
distance up to wall)  
500  
or more  
Discharge  
port  
2-Ø11 × 14 long hole  
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)  
600  
Ø11 × 14 U-shape holes  
54  
38  
2-Ø6 hole  
Product  
external  
line  
R15  
2-Ø6 hole  
R15  
600  
38  
54  
Product  
external line  
Ø11 × 14 U-shape hole  
Details of A legs  
Details of B legs  
– 21 –  
Name  
Note  
380  
Drain hole (Ø25 burring hole)  
B legs  
200  
60  
Refrigerant piping hole  
Indoor/Outdoor unit  
——  
1
2
Air inlet  
port  
connecting wire inlet hole  
Power supply inlet hole  
Ø38 Kockout hole  
Air inlet  
port  
Mounting bolt hole  
(Ø12 × 17 long hole)  
12  
75  
Air outlet  
port  
383  
Mounting bolt hole  
(Ø12 × 17 U-shape hole)  
A legs  
70  
39  
96  
5-drain hole  
(Ø20 × 88 burring hole)  
Details of A legs  
Details of B legs  
150  
600  
900  
52  
550  
320  
Refrigerant pipe  
connecting port  
30  
(Ø9.5 flare at liquid side)  
Refrigerant pipe  
connecting port  
(Ø15.9 flare at gas side)  
2
1
2
1
1
Mounting hole sold separately  
(12 - Ø3 emboss)  
60  
68  
178  
327  
178  
518  
178  
80  
18  
18  
80  
12  
64  
135  
151  
400  
83  
7
Z
Knockout for downward piping  
Unit : mm  
Z views  
RAV-TWP30E2, RAV-TWP50E2 (SimultaneousTwin)  
Inner diameter Ø C  
Inner  
diameter Ø D  
Inner  
diameter Ø D  
A
Model (RBC-)  
Liquid side  
A
B
C
D
36  
43  
34  
44  
14  
23  
14  
21  
Ø9.5  
Ø6.4  
TWP30E2  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
Ø15.9 Ø12.7  
Ø9.5 Ø9.5  
Ø15.9 Ø15.9  
TWP50E2  
– 23 –  
3. SYSTEMATIC REFRIGERATING CYCLE DIAGRAM  
3-1. Indoor Unit  
• Single type (Combination of 1 indoor unit and 1 outdoor unit)  
(Indoor unit)  
Distributor  
(Strainer incorporated)  
TCJ sensor  
Strainer  
Air heat  
exchanger  
TC sensor  
Heating  
Cooling  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØB)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side  
(Outer dia : ØA)  
To outdoor unit  
To outdoor unit  
Capillary tube specifications  
Model  
RAV-SM∗∗∗UT  
Inner dia. × Length × Q’ty  
Ø2 × 250 × 2, Ø2 × 350 × 1  
Ø2 × 700 × 1  
SM56 type  
Dimension table  
SM80 type  
Ø2 × 250 × 3, Ø2 × 500 × 1  
Outer diameter of refrigerant pipe  
Indoor unit  
Gas side ØA  
12.7  
Liquid side ØB  
Model  
RAV-SM∗∗∗SDT  
Inner dia. × Length × Q’ty  
SM40, 45, 56 type  
SM80 type  
6.4  
9.5  
15.9  
SM40, 45, 56 type  
Ø2 × 200 × 2, Ø2 × 350 × 1  
• Twin type (Combination of 2 indoor units and 1 outdoor unit)  
Heating  
Cooling  
(Indoor unit A)  
(Indoor unit B)  
Distributor  
Distributor  
(Strainer incorporated)  
(Strainer incorporated)  
TCJ sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Air heat  
exchanger  
Air heat  
exchanger  
TC sensor  
TC sensor  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØA)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side  
(Outer dia : ØB)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØA)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side  
(Outer dia : ØB)  
Branch pipe  
Branch pipe  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØD)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØC)  
To outdoor unit  
To outdoor unit  
Indoor unit  
Branch pipe RBC-  
A
B
C
D
SM40 × 2  
TWP30E2  
6.4  
12.7  
9.5  
15.9  
– 24 –  
3-2. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E  
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E  
Packed valve  
Packed valve  
Outer dia. ØB  
Outer dia. ØA  
PMV  
(Pulse Motor Valve)  
(CAM-B30YGTF-2)  
TS sensor  
TO sensor  
2-step muffler  
Ø19.05 × 200L  
TD sensor  
Strainer  
4-way valve  
(STF-0108Z)  
TE  
sensor  
Heat exchanger  
Ø8 ripple, 2 rows,  
14 steps  
Muffler  
Ø19 × L160  
Distributor  
FP1.3 flat fin  
Rotary compressor  
(DA150A1F-20F)  
R410A 1.0 kg  
Cooling  
Heating  
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E  
Pressure  
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor  
Discharge  
Suction  
exchanger  
exchanger  
frequency  
fan  
(rps)  
Pd  
Ps  
Pd  
Ps  
(TD)  
61  
(TS)  
12  
14  
4
(TC)  
11  
15  
2
(TE)  
43  
50  
8
Indoor Outdoor  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
2.68 0.94 27.3  
9.6  
47  
50  
44  
49  
49  
90  
HIGH  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
27 / 19  
32 / 24  
18 / 15.5  
20 / –  
35 / –  
43 / –  
–5 / –  
7 / 6  
3.23 1.16 32.9 11.8  
77  
1.34 0.70 13.7  
2.38 0.70 24.3  
7.1  
7.1  
36  
Standard  
65  
7
39  
54  
32  
4
Heating Overload  
Low load  
3.39 1.03 34.6 10.5  
1.95 0.26 19.9 2.7  
83  
20  
–17  
16  
–19  
30 / –  
24 / 18  
–15 / –  
90  
15 / –  
This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp  
meter becomes 2 times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).  
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E  
Pressure  
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor  
Discharge  
Suction  
exchanger  
exchanger  
frequency  
fan  
(rps)  
Pd  
Ps  
Pd  
Ps  
(TD)  
68  
(TS)  
11  
14  
4
(TC)  
10  
15  
2
(TE)  
41  
51  
8
Indoor Outdoor  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
2.81 0.89 28.7  
9.1  
53  
53  
44  
56  
49  
98  
HIGH  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
27 / 19  
32 / 24  
18 / 15.5  
20 / –  
35 / –  
43 / –  
–5 / –  
7 / 6  
3.24 1.16 33.0 11.8  
78  
1.34 0.70 13.7  
2.53 0.68 25.8  
7.1  
6.9  
36  
Standard  
70  
7
41  
54  
33  
4
Heating Overload  
Low load  
3.39 1.03 34.6 10.5  
2.00 0.25 20.4 2.6  
83  
20  
–17  
16  
–19  
30 / –  
24 / 18  
–15 / –  
92  
15 / –  
This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp  
meter becomes two times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).  
– 25 –  
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E  
PMV  
(Pulse Motor Valve)  
(CAM-B30YGTF-2)  
TO sensor  
TS  
sensor  
TD  
sensor  
TE sensor  
Muffler  
Ø31.75 × 200L  
4-way valve  
(STF-0213Z)  
Muffler  
Ø19.05 × 160L  
Heat exchanger  
Ø8 ripple, 2 rows, 20 stages  
FP1.3, flat fin  
Strainer  
Refrigerant pipe  
Distributor  
Accumulator  
(1L)  
at liquid side Ø6.4  
Packed valve  
Rotary compressor  
(DA150A1F-21F)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side Ø12.7  
Packed valve  
2-step muffler  
Ø25 × 200L  
In cooling operation  
In heating operation  
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E  
Pressure  
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)  
Pd Ps Pd Ps  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor  
Discharge  
Suction  
exchanger  
exchanger  
frequency  
fan  
(rps)  
(TD)  
72  
(TS)  
16  
(TC)  
13  
19  
7
(TE)  
42  
Indoor Outdoor  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
2.87 1.00 29.3 10.2  
3.57 1.10 36.4 11.2  
58  
76  
30  
64  
30  
88  
HIGH  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
27 / 19  
32 / 24  
18 / 15.5  
20 / –  
35 / –  
43 / –  
–5 / –  
7 / 6  
88  
20  
52  
1.71 0.76 17.4  
2.26 0.68 23.1  
7.8  
6.9  
45  
12  
13  
Standard  
66  
6
37  
53  
34  
3
Heating Overload  
Low load  
3.25 1.14 33.2 11.6  
2.00 0.25 20.4 2.6  
78  
20  
16  
30 / –  
24 / 18  
–15 / –  
78  
–18  
–18  
15 / –  
– 26 –  
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
TS sensor  
PMV  
(Pulse Motor Valve)  
(CAM-B30YGTF-2)  
TO sensor  
TL sensor  
Ø2 × Ø3 × 600L  
TD  
sensor  
Ø2 × Ø3 × 550L  
Accumulator  
Sub-ass’y  
Strainer  
Ø2 × Ø3 × 450L  
TE sensor  
4-way valve  
(STF-0218G)  
Ø2 × Ø3  
× 450L  
Muffler  
Capillary  
Heat exchanger  
Ø8, 2 rows, 34 stages  
FP1.45, flat fin  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side Ø9.5  
Packed valve  
Ø25 × L180  
Ø25 × L210  
Accumulator  
(1.8L)  
Rotary compressor  
(DA220A2F-22L)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side Ø15.9  
Ball valve  
Strainer  
In cooling operation  
In heating operation  
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
Pressure  
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor  
Discharge  
Suction  
exchanger  
exchanger  
frequency  
fan  
(rps)  
Pd  
Ps  
Pd  
Ps  
(TD)  
70  
(TS)  
13  
17  
7
(TC)  
11  
14  
3
(TE)  
39  
Indoor Outdoor  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
2.79 0.89 27.3  
8.7  
58.2  
65.0  
30.0  
61.5  
28.0  
99.6  
HIGH  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
27 / 19  
32 / 24  
35 / –  
43 / –  
3.53 1.07 34.6 10.5  
81  
48  
1.71 0.72 16.8  
2.65 0.68 26.0  
7.1  
6.7  
42  
18  
18 / 15.5 –15 / –  
Standard  
74  
4
44  
52  
31  
3
20 / –  
30 / –  
15 / –  
7 / 6  
Heating Overload  
Low load  
3.20 1.11 31.4 10.9  
2.33 0.21 22.8 2.1  
76  
19  
–18  
15  
24 / 18  
–20 / –  
93  
–20  
– 27 –  
4. FAN CHARACTERISTICS  
4-1. Slim Duct (Filter Attached)  
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E  
Standard air volume : 690m³/h  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
High (50Pa)  
Upper limit of external  
static pressure(50Pa)  
High  
(35Pa)  
Lower limit of  
external static  
Upper limit of  
external static  
pressure(35Pa)  
pressure (50Pa)  
Lower limit of  
external static  
pressure (35Pa)  
Low (50Pa)  
Upper limit of  
external static  
pressure  
(20Pa)  
High  
(20Pa)  
Low (35Pa)  
Low (20Pa)  
Lower limit of  
external static  
pressure (20Pa)  
Upper limit of  
external static  
pressure(10Pa)  
High  
(10Pa)  
10  
0
Low (10Pa)  
Standard filte  
pressure loss  
400  
500  
600  
700  
800  
Air volume (m³/h)  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
Standard air volume : 780m³/h  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
High (50Pa)  
Upper limit of external  
static pressure(50Pa)  
Lower limit of  
external static  
pressure (50Pa)  
High  
(35Pa)  
Upper limit of  
external static  
pressure(35Pa)  
Lower limit of  
external static  
pressure (35Pa)  
Low (50Pa)  
High  
(20Pa)  
Upper limit of  
external static  
pressure  
(20Pa)  
Low (35Pa)  
Lower limit of  
external static  
pressure (20Pa)  
Upper limit of  
external static  
pressure(10Pa)  
High  
(10Pa)  
10  
0
Low (20Pa)  
Low (10Pa)  
Standard filte  
pressure loss  
400  
500  
600  
700  
800  
900  
Air volume (m³/h)  
– 28 –  
5. WIRING DIAGRAM  
5-1. Indoor Unit  
5-1-1. Slim DuctType  
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E  
FM  
DM  
FS  
CN333  
(WHI)  
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
CN510  
(WHI)  
CN504 CN34  
(WHI) (RED)  
Motor drive  
circuit  
1
2
1
2
CN104  
(YEL)  
TA  
TCJ  
TC  
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN334  
(WHI)  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
Fuse, F01  
T6.3A, 250V~  
Fuse, F02  
T3.15A, 250V~  
+
~
~
RED  
WHI  
BLK  
1
2
3
4
DC20V  
CN519  
1
3
5
1
3
5
Power  
supply  
circuit  
DC15V  
(WHI)  
DC12V  
DC7V  
CN67  
(BLK)  
1
2
CN508  
(RED)  
Control P.C. Board  
for Indoor Unit  
MCC-1570  
1
2
3
CN80  
P01  
BLK  
(GRN)  
1
2
CN73  
(RED)  
(EXCT)  
1
2
CN66  
(WHI)  
1
2
CN70  
(WHI)  
CN41  
(BLU)  
CN309  
(YEL)  
CN61 CN32  
(YEL) (WHI)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
CN50  
(WHI)  
CN20  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
3
3
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1
2
3
4
5
2
(T10)  
(Fan drive)  
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
CN51  
(RED)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
BLK  
BLK  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
A B  
P.C. board  
MCC-1440  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
A
B
Terminal  
CN001  
(WHI)  
U3 U4  
for central  
Serial  
signal  
remote controller  
Wired  
Adapter for  
Connection interface  
(Option)  
remote controller wireless remote controller  
L N  
Signal phase  
220–240V~, 50Hz  
Color  
Identification  
Outdoor unit  
Symbol  
FM  
Parts name  
BLK : BLACK  
BLU : BLUE  
RED : RED  
GRN : GREEN  
WHI : WHITE  
Fan Motor  
TA  
Indoor temp. sensor  
Temp. sensor  
TC, TCJ  
DM  
Outdoor unit  
earth screw  
Drain pump Motor  
Float Switch  
YEL : YELLOW  
FS  
– 29 –  
49C  
ORN  
ORN  
2 2  
1 1  
CN500  
CN300  
Compressor  
RED  
WHI  
BLK  
P04  
P05  
P06  
BLK  
WHI  
RED  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
Q200~205  
IGBT  
Q300~305  
MOS-FET  
CM  
FM  
P.C. Board  
(MCC-5009)  
R221  
R321  
Fan motor  
P25  
6 6  
5
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
YEL  
R220  
R219  
R320  
R319  
P24  
P23  
PMV  
YEL  
BRN  
YEL  
CN700  
P22  
P21  
Pulse motor valve  
F03  
CAUTION : HIGH VOLTAGE  
P20  
P35  
Varistor  
L03  
C13  
Fuse  
L01  
3 3  
2
T3.15A  
AC250V  
The high voltage circuit is  
incorporated.  
P34  
DB01  
CN603 1 1  
Be careful to do the check service,  
as the electric shock may be  
caused in case of touching  
parts on the  
TS  
(Suction pipe  
temp. sensor)  
Surge  
absorber  
2 2  
C12 C14  
CN602 1 1  
P.C. board by hand  
Power  
relay  
TO  
(Outdoor  
temp. sensor)  
Varistor  
P19  
3 3  
2
CN601 1 1  
DB02  
The 4-way valve coil is turned on  
while the cooling operation  
CT  
ORN  
F01  
Fuse  
T25A  
AC250V  
P18  
P11  
TD  
Relay  
(Discharge pipe  
temp. sensor)  
2 2  
1 1  
2 2  
CN600 1 1  
P08  
Reactor  
TE  
Q404  
P02  
WHI CN806  
P03 P10  
ORN BLK  
(Condenser pipe  
temp. sensor)  
P33  
P32  
CN701  
P30  
P7  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1
1
3
3
1 2 3 4 5  
For optional P.C. Board  
CN605  
BLK  
P31  
BLK  
2 1  
2 1  
PUR  
Coil for  
4-WAY  
VALVE  
Reactor  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
NOTE  
CM : Compressor  
PMV : Pulse Motor Valve  
FM : Fan Motor  
SW802  
GRN/YEL  
Fuse 250V~  
T6.3A  
Reactor  
MCC-1530  
RED  
TE : Heat Exchanger Temp. Sensor  
TD : Discharge Temp. Sensor  
TO : Outdoor Temp. Sensor  
TS : Suction Temp. Sensor  
IGBT : Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor  
DB : Rectifier  
Sub P.C. Board  
Color Identification  
BLK : BLACK WHI : WHITE  
BLU : BLUE  
RED : RED  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
GRN : GREEN  
1 2 3 L N  
BRN : BROWN  
ORN : ORANGE  
YEL : YELLOW  
PUR : PURPLE  
CT : Curreut Transformer  
49C : Compressor Case Thermostat  
To indoor  
Power supply  
220-240V~ 50Hz  
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
<MCC-1571>  
CM  
Reactor  
Reactor  
(RED) (WHI) (BLK)  
(GRY)  
(GRY)  
(WHI)  
(WHI)  
U
V
W
P04 P05  
P06 P07  
CN200 CN201 CN202  
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN300  
(WHI)  
FM  
49C  
SW804 SW801 SW800  
1
2
1
2
CN609  
(BLU)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN610  
(YEL)  
Control P.C. Board  
MCC-1571  
SW803  
1
2
1
2
CN604  
(WHI)  
TL  
L/F  
1
3
1
2
3
CN603  
(WHI)  
TD  
Fuse, F01  
T25A, 250V~  
1
2
1
2
CN602  
(YEL)  
(BLK)  
TO  
TE  
P09  
SW802  
Fuse, F03  
T10A, 250V~  
1
2
1
2
CN601  
(WHI)  
RY704  
1
3
1
2
3
CN600  
(WHI)  
TS  
CN704  
(BLU)  
CN701  
(WHI)  
CN04  
(WHI)  
P01  
P02  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
1
3
1
1
4
4
1
1
3
3
5
5
7
7
CN710  
(WHI)  
(RED)  
(WHI)  
PMW  
20SF  
Earth  
screw  
Earth  
screw  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
L
N
Outdoor unit  
Indoor unit  
Symbol  
CM  
FM  
PMV  
TD  
TS  
TE  
TL  
TO  
Parts name  
Compressor  
Fan Motor  
Power supply  
220–240V~, 50Hz  
Pulse Motor Valve  
Earth  
screw  
Pipe temp. sensor (Discharge)  
Pipe temp. sensor (Suction)  
Heat exchanger sensor 1  
Heat exchanger sensor 2  
Outside temp. sensor  
4-way valve coil  
20SF  
49C  
RY  
Color  
Identification  
Compressor case thermostat  
Relay  
L/F  
Line Filter  
BLK  
BLU  
RED : RED  
GRY : GRAY  
WHI  
YEL  
: BLACK  
: BLUE  
1.  
indicates the terminal block.  
Alphanumeric characters in the cycle indicate the terminal No.  
2. The two-dot chain line indicates the wiring procured locally.  
3. indicates the P.C. board.  
: WHITE  
: YELLOW  
4. For the indoor unit circuit, refer to the wiring diagram of the indoor unit.  
– 31 –  
6. SPECIFICATIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS  
6-1. Indoor Unit  
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Fan motor  
Type  
SWF-280-60-3  
Specifications  
2
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
TA sensor  
MDP-1401  
3
FS-0218-102  
4
Lead wire length : 328mm  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200 mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200 mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
10 kat 25°C  
5
TC sensor  
10 kat 25°C  
6
TCJ sensor  
10 kat 25°C  
6-2. Outdoor Unit (Parts Ratings)  
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E  
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E  
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E  
No.  
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
1
Fan motor  
Compressor  
Reactor  
ICF-140-43-4R  
Output (Rated) 43 W  
40, 45 : DA150A1F-20F  
40, 56 : DA150A1F-21F  
2
3 phase, 4P, 1100 W  
3
4
CH-57  
10mH, 16A  
Outdoor temp. sensor (To sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (Te sensor)  
Suction temp. sensor (Ts sensor)  
Discharge temp. sensor (Td sensor)  
Fuse (Switching power (Protect))  
Fuse (Inverter, input (Current protect))  
4-way valve solenoid coil  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
50 kat 25°C  
T3.15A, AC 250V  
AC240V  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
STF-01AJ502E1  
US-622  
Compressor thermo. (Protection)  
Coil (Pulse Motor Valve)  
OFF: 125 ± 4°C, ON: 90 ± 5°C  
CAM-MD12TF-12  
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
Compressor  
Outdoor fan motor  
Reactor  
DA220A2F-22L  
2
ICF-280-A60-1  
Output 60 W  
3
CH-56  
5.8 mH, 18.5 A  
AC200 – 240 V  
DC12 V  
4
4-way valve coil  
PMV coil  
VHV-01AP552B1  
5
CAM-MD12TF-15  
6
P.C. board  
MCC-1571  
AC220 – 240 V  
AC250 V, 25 A  
AC250 V, 10 A  
AC250 V, 3.15 A  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
50 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
OFF: 125 ± 4°C, ON: 90 ± 5°C  
7
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)  
8
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)  
9
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Outdoor temp. sensor (TO sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (Te sensor)  
Discharge temp. sensor (Td sensor)  
Heat exchanger Temp sensor (Ts sensor)  
Compressor thermo. (Protection)  
US-622  
– 32 –  
7. REFRIGERANT R410A  
This air conditioner adopts the new refrigerant HFC  
(R410A) which does not damage the ozone layer.  
6. When an air conditioning system charged with a  
large volume of refrigerant is installed in a small  
room, it is necessary to exercise care so that,  
even when refrigerant leaks, its concentration  
does not exceed the marginal level.  
The working pressure of the new refrigerant R410A  
is 1.6 times higher than conventional refrigerant  
(R22). The refrigerating oil is also changed in  
accordance with change of refrigerant, so be careful  
that water, dust, and existing refrigerant or  
refrigerating oil are not entered in the refrigerant  
cycle of the air conditioner using the new refrigerant  
during installation work or servicing time.  
If the refrigerant gas leakage occurs and its  
concentration exceeds the marginal level, an  
oxygen starvation accident may result.  
7. Be sure to carry out installation or removal  
according to the installation manual.  
The next section describes the precautions for air  
conditioner using the new refrigerant.  
Improper installation may cause refrigeration  
trouble, water leakage, electric shock, fire, etc.  
Conforming to contents of the next section together  
with the general cautions included in this manual,  
perform the correct and safe work.  
8. Unauthorized modifications to the air conditioner  
may be dangerous. If a breakdown occurs  
please call a qualified air conditioner technician  
or electrician.  
Improper repair may result in water leakage,  
electric shock and fire, etc.  
7-1. Safety During Installation/Servicing  
As R410A’s pressure is about 1.6 times higher than  
that of R22, improper installation/servicing may  
cause a serious trouble. By using tools and  
materials exclusive for R410A, it is necessary to  
carry out installation/servicing safely while taking  
the following precautions into consideration.  
7-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation  
7-2-1. Piping Materials and Joints Used  
For the refrigerant piping installation, copper pipes  
and joints are mainly used.  
1. Never use refrigerant other than R410A in an air  
conditioner which is designed to operate with  
R410A.  
Copper pipes and joints suitable for the refrigerant  
must be chosen and installed.  
Furthermore, it is necessary to use clean copper  
pipes and joints whose interior surfaces are less  
affected by contaminants.  
If other refrigerant than R410A is mixed,  
pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes  
abnormally high, and it may cause personal  
injury, etc. by a rupture.  
1. Copper Pipes  
2. Confirm the used refrigerant name, and use  
tools and materials exclusive for the refrigerant  
R410A.  
It is necessary to use seamless copper pipes  
which are made of either copper or copper alloy  
and it is desirable that the amount of residual oil  
is less than 40 mg/10 m.  
The refrigerant name R410A is indicated on the  
visible place of the outdoor unit of the air  
conditioner using R410A as refrigerant.  
Do not use copper pipes having a collapsed,  
deformed or discolored portion (especially on  
the interior surface).  
To prevent mischarging, the diameter of the  
service port differs from that of R22.  
Otherwise, the expansion valve or capillary tube  
may become blocked with contaminants.  
3. If a refrigeration gas leakage occurs during  
installation/servicing, be sure to ventilate fully.  
As an air conditioner using R410A incurs pres-  
sure higher than when using R22, it is necessary  
to choose adequate materials.  
If the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire,  
a poisonous gas may occur.  
Thicknesses of copper pipes used with R410A  
are as shown in Table 7-2-1. Never use copper  
pipes thinner than 0.8mm even when it is avail-  
able on the market.  
4. When installing or removing an air conditioner,  
do not allow air or moisture to remain in the  
refrigeration cycle.  
Otherwise, pressure in the refrigeration cycle  
may become abnormally high so that a rupture  
or personal injury may be caused.  
NOTE:  
5. After completion of installation work, check to  
make sure that there is no refrigeration gas  
leakage.  
Refer to the “7-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping  
of R22 or R407C”.  
If the refrigerant gas leaks into the room, coming  
into contact with fire in the fan-driven heater,  
space heater, etc., a poisonous gas may occur.  
– 33 –  
Table 7-2-1 Thicknesses of annealed copper pipes  
Thickness (mm)  
Nominal diameter  
Outer diameter (mm)  
R410A  
0.80  
R22  
0.80  
0.80  
0.80  
1.00  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.80  
12.7  
15.9  
0.80  
1.00  
1. Joints  
For copper pipes, flare joints or socket joints are used. Prior to use, be sure to remove all contaminants.  
a) Flare Joints  
Flare joints used to connect the copper pipes cannot be used for pipings whose outer diameter exceeds  
20 mm. In such a case, socket joints can be used.  
Sizes of flare pipe ends, flare joint ends and flare nuts are as shown in Tables 7-2-3 to 7-2-5 below.  
b) Socket Joints  
Socket joints are such that they are brazed for connections, and used mainly for thick pipings whose  
diameter is larger than 20 mm. Thicknesses of socket joints are as shown in Table 7-2-2.  
Table 7-2-2 Minimum thicknesses of socket joints  
Reference outer diameter of  
copper pipe jointed (mm)  
Minimum joint thickness  
(mm)  
Nominal diameter  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.50  
0.60  
0.70  
0.80  
12.7  
15.9  
7-2-2. Processing of Piping Materials  
When performing the refrigerant piping installation, care should be taken to ensure that water or dust does not  
enter the pipe interior, that no other oil other than lubricating oils used in the installed air conditioner is used,  
and that refrigerant does not leak.  
When using lubricating oils in the piping processing, use such lubricating oils whose water content has been  
removed. When stored, be sure to seal the container with an airtight cap or any other cover.  
1. Flare Processing Procedures and Precautions  
a) Cutting the Pipe  
By means of a pipe cutter, slowly cut the pipe so that it is not deformed.  
b) Removing Burrs and Chips  
If the flared section has chips or burrs, refrigerant leakage may occur.  
Carefully remove all burrs and clean the cut surface before installation.  
– 34 –  
c) Insertion of Flare Nut  
d) Flare Processing  
Make certain that a clamp bar and copper pipe have been cleaned.  
By means of the clamp bar, perform the flare processing correctly.  
Use either a flare tool for R410A or conventional flare tool.  
ØD  
A
Flare processing dimensions differ according  
to the type of flare tool.  
When using a conventional flare tool, be sure  
to secure “dimension A” by using a gauge for  
size adjustment.  
Fig. 7-2-1 Flare processing dimensions  
Table 7-2-3 Dimensions related to flare processing for R410A / R22  
A (mm)  
Outer  
diameter  
(mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Conventional flare tool  
(R410A)  
Conventional flare tool  
(R22)  
Flare tool for  
R410A, R22  
clutch type  
Clutch type Wing nut type Clutch type Wing nut type  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.5 to 2.0  
1.5 to 2.0  
2.0 to 2.5  
2.0 to 2.5  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.5 to 2.0  
1.5 to 2.0  
12.7  
15.9  
Table 7-2-4 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R410A  
Dimension (mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Flare nut width  
(mm)  
(mm)  
A
B
C
D
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
9.1  
9.2  
6.5  
13  
20  
23  
25  
17  
22  
26  
29  
13.2  
16.6  
19.7  
13.5  
16.0  
19.0  
9.7  
12.7  
15.9  
12.9  
16.0  
Table 7-2-5 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R22  
Dimension (mm)  
Flare nut width  
(mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
(mm)  
A
B
C
D
17  
22  
24  
27  
36  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
3/4  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.0  
9.1  
9.2  
6.5  
13  
20  
20  
23  
34  
13.0  
16.2  
19.4  
23.3  
13.5  
16.0  
19.0  
24.0  
9.7  
12.7  
15.9  
19.0  
12.9  
16.0  
19.2  
– 35 –  
D
B
A
C
Fig. 7-2-2 Relations between flare nut and flare seal surface  
2. Flare Connecting Procedures and Precautions  
a) Make sure that the flare and union portions do not have any scar or dust, etc.  
b) Correctly align the processed flare surface with the union axis.  
c) Tighten the flare with designated torque by means of a torque wrench.  
The tightening torque for R410A is the same as that for conventional R22.  
Incidentally, when the torque is weak, the gas leakage may occur.  
When it is strong, the flare nut may crack and may be made non-removable.  
When choosing the tightening torque, comply with values designated by manufacturers.  
Table 7-2-6 shows reference values.  
NOTE:  
When applying oil to the flare surface, be sure to use oil designated by the manufacturer.  
If any other oil is used, the lubricating oils may deteriorate and cause the compressor to burn out.  
Table 7-2-6 Tightening torque of flare for R410A [Reference values]  
Tightening torque of torque  
wrenches available on the market  
N•m (kgf•m)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
(mm)  
Tightening torque  
N•m (kgf•m)  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
14 to 18 (1.4 to 1.8)  
33 to 42 (3.3 to 4.2)  
50 to 62 (5.0 to 6.2)  
63 to 77 (6.3 to 7.7)  
16 (1.6), 18 (1.8)  
42 (4.2)  
12.7  
15.9  
55 (5.5)  
65 (6.5)  
– 36 –  
7-3. Tools  
7-3-1. RequiredTools  
Refer to the “4.Tools” (Page 8)  
7-4. Recharging of Refrigerant  
When it is necessary to recharge refrigerant, charge the specified amount of new refrigerant according to the  
following steps.  
Recover the refrigerant, and check no refrigerant  
remains in the equipment.  
When the compound gauges pointer has indicated  
0.1 Mpa (76 cmHg), place the handle Low in the  
fully closed position, and turn off the vacuum pumps  
power switch.  
Connect the charge hose to packed valve service  
port at the outdoor units gas side.  
Keep the status as it is for 1 to 2 minutes, and ensure  
that the compound gauges pointer does not return.  
Connect the charge hose of the vacuum pump  
adapter.  
Set the refrigerant cylinder to the electronic balance,  
connect the connecting hose to the cylinder and the  
connecting port of the electronic balance, and charge  
liquid refrigerant.  
Open fully both packed valves at liquid and gas  
sides.  
Place the handle of the gauge manifold Low in the  
fully opened position, and turn on the vacuum pumps  
power switch. Then, evacuating the refrigerant in the  
cycle.  
(For refrigerant charging, see the figure below.)  
1) Never charge refrigerant exceeding the specified amount.  
2) If the specified amount of refrigerant cannot be charged, charge refrigerant bit by bit in COOL mode.  
3) Do not carry out additional charging.  
When additional charging is carried out if refrigerant leaks, the refrigerant composition changes in the  
refrigeration cycle, that is characteristics of the air conditioner changes, refrigerant exceeding the  
specified amount is charged, and working pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes abnormally high  
pressure, and may cause a rupture or personal injury.  
(INDOOR unit)  
(Liquid side)  
(OUTDOOR unit)  
Opened  
Closed  
(Gas side)  
Refrigerant cylinder  
(With siphon pipe)  
Check valve  
Open/Close valve  
for charging  
Service port  
Electronic balance for refrigerant charging  
Fig. 7-4-1 Configuration of refrigerant charging  
– 37 –  
1) Be sure to make setting so that liquid can be charged.  
2) When using a cylinder equipped with a siphon, liquid can be charged without turning it upside down.  
It is necessary for charging refrigerant under condition of liquid because R410A is mixed type of refrigerant.  
Accordingly, when charging refrigerant from the refrigerant cylinder to the equipment, charge it turning the  
cylinder upside down if cylinder is not equipped with siphon.  
[ Cylinder with siphon ]  
[ Cylinder without siphon ]  
Gauge manifold  
Gauge manifold  
OUTDOOR unit  
OUTDOOR unit  
c y l i n d e r  
a n t i g e r R e f r  
Refrigerant  
cylinder  
Electronic  
balance  
Electronic  
balance  
Siphon  
R410A refrigerant is HFC mixed refrigerant.  
Therefore, if it is charged with gas, the  
composition of the charged refrigerant changes  
and the characteristics of the equipment varies.  
Fig. 7-4-2  
7-5. Brazing of Pipes  
7-5-1. Materials for Brazing  
1. Silver brazing filler  
1) Phosphor bronze brazing filler tends to react  
with sulfur and produce a fragile compound  
water solution, which may cause a gas  
leakage. Therefore, use any other type of  
brazing filler at a hot spring resort, etc., and  
coat the surface with a paint.  
Silver brazing filler is an alloy mainly composed  
of silver and copper.  
It is used to join iron, copper or copper alloy, and  
is relatively expensive though it excels in solder-  
ability.  
2) When performing brazing again at time of  
servicing, use the same type of brazing filler.  
2. Phosphor bronze brazing filler  
7-5-2. Flux  
Phosphor bronze brazing filler is generally used  
to join copper or copper alloy.  
1. Reason why flux is necessary  
• By removing the oxide film and any foreign  
matter on the metal surface, it assists the flow  
of brazing filler.  
3. Low temperature brazing filler  
Low temperature brazing filler is generally called  
solder, and is an alloy of tin and lead.  
• In the brazing process, it prevents the metal  
surface from being oxidized.  
Since it is weak in adhesive strength, do not use  
it for refrigerant pipes.  
• By reducing the brazing filler's surface tension,  
the brazing filler adheres better to the treated  
metal.  
– 38 –  
2. Characteristics required for flux  
7-5-3. Brazing  
• Activated temperature of flux coincides with  
the brazing temperature.  
As brazing work requires sophisticated techniques,  
experiences based upon a theoretical knowledge, it  
must be performed by a person qualified.  
• Due to a wide effective temperature range, flux  
is hard to carbonize.  
In order to prevent the oxide film from occurring in  
the pipe interior during brazing, it is effective to  
proceed with brazing while letting dry Nitrogen gas  
flow.  
• It is easy to remove slag after brazing.  
• The corrosive action to the treated metal and  
brazing filler is minimum.  
• It excels in coating performance and is  
harmless to the human body.  
Never use gas other than Nitrogen gas.  
1. Brazing method to prevent oxidation  
As the flux works in a complicated manner as  
described above, it is necessary to select an  
adequate type of flux according to the type and  
shape of treated metal, type of brazing filler and  
brazing method, etc.  
1) Attach a reducing valve and a flow-meter to  
the Nitrogen gas cylinder.  
2) Use a copper pipe to direct the piping  
material, and attach a flow-meter to the  
cylinder.  
3. Types of flux  
• Noncorrosive flux  
3) Apply a seal onto the clearance between the  
piping material and inserted copper pipe for  
Nitrogen in order to prevent backflow of the  
Nitrogen gas.  
Generally, it is a compound of borax and boric  
acid.  
It is effective in case where the brazing  
temperature is higher than 800°C.  
4) When the Nitrogen gas is flowing, be sure to  
keep the piping end open.  
• Activated flux  
Most of fluxes generally used for silver brazing  
are this type.  
5) Adjust the flow rate of Nitrogen gas so that it  
is lower than 0.05 m³/Hr or 0.02 MPa  
It features an increased oxide film removing  
capability due to the addition of compounds  
such as potassium fluoride, potassium chloride  
and sodium fluoride to the borax-boric acid  
compound.  
(0.2kgf/cm²) by means of the reducing valve.  
6) After performing the steps above, keep the  
Nitrogen gas flowing until the pipe cools down  
to a certain extent (temperature at which  
pipes are touchable with hands).  
7) Remove the flux completely after brazing.  
4. Piping materials for brazing and used  
brazing filler/flux  
Piping  
material  
Used brazing  
filler  
Used  
flux  
M
Flow meter  
Copper - Copper Phosphor copper Do not use  
Copper - Iron  
Iron - Iron  
Silver  
Silver  
Paste flux  
Vapor flux  
Stop valve  
Nitrogen gas  
cylinder  
From Nitrogen cylinder  
1) Do not enter flux into the refrigeration cycle.  
2) When chlorine contained in the flux remains  
within the pipe, the lubricating oil deteriorates.  
Pipe  
Nitrogen  
gas  
Therefore, use a flux which does not contain  
chlorine.  
Rubber plug  
3) When adding water to the flux, use water  
which does not contain chlorine  
(e.g. distilled water or ion-exchange water).  
4) Remove the flux after brazing.  
Fig. 7-5-1 Prevention of oxidation during brazing  
– 39 –  
7-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping of R22 or R407C  
6. Check the oil when the existing air conditioner was  
Instruction of Works:  
removed after refrigerant had been recovered.  
The existing R22 and R407C piping can be  
reused for our digital inverter R410A products  
installations.  
In this case, if the oil is judged as clearly different  
compared with normal oil  
• The refrigerator oil is copper rust green :  
There is possibility that moisture is mixed with the  
oil and rust generates inside of the pipe.  
NOTE)  
Confirmation of existence of scratch or dent of the  
former pipes to be applied and also confirmation of  
reliability of the pipe strength are conventionally  
referred to the local site.  
• There is discolored oil, a large quantity of the  
remains, or bad smell.  
• A large quantity of sparkle remained wear-out  
powder is observed in the refrigerator oil.  
If the definite conditions can be cleared,  
it is possible to update the existing R22 and  
R407C pipes to those for R410A models.  
7. The air conditioner which compressor was ex-  
changed due to a faulty compressor.  
When the discolored oil, a large quantity of the  
remains, mixture of foreign matter, or a large  
quantity of sparkle remained wear-out powder is  
observed, the cause of trouble will occur.  
7-6-1. Basic Conditions Needed to Reuse the  
Existing Pipe  
Check and observe three conditions of the refrigerant  
piping works.  
8. Installation and removal of the air conditioner are  
repeated with temporary installation by lease and  
etc.  
1. Dry  
(There is no moisture inside of the pipes.)  
2. Clean (There is no dust inside of the pipes.)  
3. Tight (There is no refrigerant leak.)  
9. In case that type of the refrigerator oil of the  
existing air conditioner is other than the following oil  
(Mineral oil), Suniso, Freol-S, MS (Synthetic oil),  
alkyl benzene (HAB, Barrel-freeze), ester series,  
PVE only of ether series.  
7-6-2. Restricted Items to Use the Existing Pipes  
In the following cases, the existing pipes cannot be  
reused as they are. Clean the existing pipes or  
exchange them with new pipes.  
• Winding-insulation of the compressor may  
become inferior.  
1. When a scratch or dent is heavy, be sure to use the  
new pipes for the works.  
NOTE)  
2. When the thickness of the existing pipe is thinner  
than the specified “Pipe diameter and thickness” be  
sure to use the new pipes for the works.  
The above descriptions are results of confirmation by  
our company and they are views on our air  
conditioners, but they do not guarantee the use of the  
existing pipes of the air conditioner that adopted  
R410A in other companies.  
• The operating pressure of R410A is high  
(1.6 times of R22 and R407C). If there is a scratch  
or dent on the pipe or thinner pipe is used, the  
pressure strength is poor and may cause break-  
age of the pipe at the worst.  
7-6-3. Branching Pipe for Simultaneous  
Operation System  
• In the concurrent twin system, when TOSHIBA-  
specified branching pipe is used, it can be reused.  
Pipe diameter and thickness (mm)  
Branching pipe model name: RBC-TWP30E-2.  
Pipe outer diameter Ø6.4 Ø9.5 Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0  
On the existing air conditioner for simultaneous  
operation system (twin system), there is a case of  
using branch pipe that has insufficient compressive  
strength.  
R410A  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.0  
Thickness  
R22  
(R407C)  
In this case please change it to the branch pipe for  
R410A.  
• In case that the pipe diameter is Ø12.7 mm or less  
and the thickness is less than 0.7 mm, be sure to  
use the new pipes for works.  
7-6-4. Curing of Pipes  
When removing and opening the indoor unit or outdoor  
unit for a long time, cure the pipes as follows:  
3. The pipes are left as coming out or gas leaks.  
(Poor refrigerant)  
• There is possibility that rain water or air including  
moisture enters in the pipe.  
• Otherwise rust may generate when moisture or  
foreign matter due to dewing enters in the pipes.  
4. Refrigerant recovery is impossible.  
(Refrigerant recovery by the pump-down operation  
on the existing air conditioner)  
• The rust cannot be removed by cleaning, and a new  
piping work is necessary.  
• There is possibility that a large quantity of poor  
oil or moisture remains inside of the pipe.  
Place position  
Outdoors  
Term  
Curing manner  
1 month or more  
Less than 1 month  
Every time  
Pinching  
5. A dryer on the market is attached to the existing pipes.  
• There is possibility that copper green rust  
generated.  
Pinching or taping  
Indoors  
– 40 –  
7-6-5. Final Installation Checks  
Is there no scratch or dent on the existing pipes?  
Existing pipe: NO * Use a new pipes.  
NO  
Is it possible to operate the existing air conditioner?  
YES  
After the existing air conditioner operated in cooling mode  
for approx. 30 minutes or longer*, recover the refrigerant.  
For cooling the pipes and recovering of oil  
Refrigerant recovery: Pump down method  
Nitrogen gas pressure 0.5 Mpa  
Remove the existing air conditioner from the piping and  
carry out flashing (nitrogen pressure 0.5 Mpa) to remove  
the remains inside of the pipe.  
Note] In case of twin, also be sure to flash the  
branching pipe.  
(If there is discharge of remains,  
it is judged that there is a large quantity of remains.)  
Was not largely discolored oil or  
a large quantity of remains discharged?  
(When the oil deteriorates, the color of the  
oil changes to muddy and black color.)  
NO  
Clean the pipes or use the new pipes.  
If you are in trouble of  
pipe cleaning, please contact us.  
YES  
Connect the indoor/outdoor units to the existing pipe.  
Use a flare nut attached to the main unit for the  
indoor/outdoor units.  
(Do not use the flare nut of the existing pipe.)  
Re-machine the flare machining size to size for R410A.  
Piping necessary to change the flare nut/  
machining size due to pipe compression.  
In case that the gas pipe Ø19 mm is used for the  
outdoor unit of SM803 (3 HP) or higher:  
(Gas pipe size of our R410A model 3 is Ø15.9 mm)  
1) Flare nut width: H  
(mm)  
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0  
Turn the existing pipe switch on the cycle control  
Copper pipe  
outer dia.  
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
P.C board of the outdoor unit to ON side.  
At shipment from factory OFF ON for existing pipe  
(Refer to the table below.) (Be sure to set the contents  
in the table below in order to restrict the refrigerating  
cycle pressure of the equipment in the pipe standard.)  
17  
22  
26  
24  
29  
27  
36  
For R410A  
H
Same  
For R22  
Same as above  
as above  
Existing pipe SW  
Switch  
2) Flare machining size: A  
(mm)  
Copper pipe  
outer dia.  
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
13.2  
13.0  
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0  
3 HP  
Bit 3 of SW802 ON  
A
9.1  
9.0  
16.6  
16.2  
19.7  
19.4  
24.0  
23.3  
For R410A  
For R22  
Becomes large a little for R410A  
Do not apply the refrigerator oil to the flare surface.  
(Airtight test), Vacuum dry, Refrigerant charge,  
Gas leak check  
Trial run  
– 41 –  
RAV-SP804AT-E  
7-6-6. Handling of Existing Pipe  
To use an existing Ø19.1 mm pipe, set bit 3 of  
SW802 (switch for existing pipe) on the P.C. board  
of the outdoor unit to ON.  
When using the existing pipe, carefully check it for  
the following:  
• Wall thickness (within the specified range)  
• Scratches and dents  
In this case, the heating performance may be  
reduced depending on the outside air temperature  
and room temperature.  
• Water, oil, dirt, or dust in the pipe  
• Flare looseness and leakage from welds  
• Deterioration of copper pipe and heat insulator  
SW802  
Cautions for using existing pipe  
When shipped from factory  
When using existing pipe  
• Do not reuse the flare to prevent gas leak.  
Replace it with the supplied flare nut and then  
process it to a flare.  
• Blow nitrogen gas or use an appropriate means to  
keep the inside of the pipe clean.  
If discolored oil or much residue is discharged,  
wash the pipe.  
• Check welds, if any, on the pipe for gas leak.  
When the pipe corresponds to any of the follow-  
ing, do not use it. Install a new pipe instead.  
• The pipe has been open (disconnected from  
indoor unit or outdoor unit) for a long period.  
• The pipe has been connected to an outdoor unit  
that does not use refrigerant R22, R410A or  
R407C.  
• The existing pipe must have a wall thickness equal  
to or larger than the following thickness.  
Reference outside diameter  
(mm)  
Wall thickness  
(mm)  
Ø9.5  
Ø15.9  
Ø19.1  
0.8  
1.0  
1.0  
• Never use any pipe with a wall thickness less than  
these thicknesses due to insufficient pressure  
capacity.  
– 42 –  
8. INDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT (Slim DuctType)  
8-1. Indoor Controller Block Diagram  
8-1-1. Connection of Wired Remote Controller  
Wired remote controller (Max. 2 units)  
Weekly timer  
Display LCD  
Display LED  
Function setup  
Key switch  
Display LCD  
LCD driver  
MCU  
Function setup  
Key switch  
CN2  
CN1  
MCU  
DC5V  
DC5V  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
Power circuit  
3  
Power  
circuit  
Secondary  
battery  
Indoor unit  
#1 (Master)  
#2  
(Follower)  
A
#3  
A
B
(Follower)  
B
A
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)  
DC20V  
Remote controller  
EEPROM  
TA sensor  
TC sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Float input  
HA  
communication circuit  
DC5V  
DC12V  
Humidifier output  
Same as left  
Same as left  
Drain  
pump  
2  
2  
Driver  
MCU  
Auto grille  
panel  
Outside  
output  
Indoor  
MCU  
fan motor  
Serial send/  
receive circuit  
Run  
Warning  
Defrost  
Thermo. ON  
COOL  
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
synchronous  
signal input circuit  
HEAT  
FAN  
Power circuit  
DC280V  
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit  
Outdoor unit  
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
(Option)  
Outdoor unit  
Up to 8 units are connectable. 1  
TCC-LINK  
adapter P.C. board  
(MCC-1440)  
1 However Max.7 units are connectable in case of mounting network adapter  
TCC-LINK  
Central controller  
(Option)  
U3  
U4  
TCC-LINK  
communication circuit  
when two wired remote controllers are connected.  
2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.  
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.  
3 Connection of the weekly timer to the sub remote controller is unavailable.  
– 43 –  
8-1-2. Connection of Wireless Remote Controller Kit  
Indoor unit  
#1 (Master)  
Wireless remote controller kit  
Receiver P.C. board (MCC-1504)  
Display LED  
Receive circuit  
Buzzer  
Function setup SW  
Grille up/down SW  
MCU  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
Temporary  
operation SW  
#2  
(Follower)  
A
#3  
(Follower)  
A
A
B
B
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)  
DC20V  
Remote controller  
EEPROM  
TA sensor  
TC sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Float input  
HA  
communication circuit  
DC5V  
DC12V  
Humidifier output  
Same as left  
Same as left  
Drain  
pump  
2  
2  
Driver  
MCU  
Auto grille  
panel  
Outside  
output  
Indoor  
MCU  
fan motor  
Serial send/  
receive circuit  
Run  
Warning  
Defrost  
Thermo. ON  
COOL  
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
synchronous  
signal input circuit  
HEAT  
FAN  
Power circuit  
DC280V  
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit  
Outdoor unit  
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
(Option)  
Outdoor unit  
TCC-LINK  
adapter P.C. board  
(MCC-1440)  
Up to 8 units are connectable. 1  
TCC-LINK  
Central controller  
(Option)  
U3  
U4  
TCC-LINK  
communication circuit  
1 However Max.7 units are connectable in case of mounting network adapter  
when two wireless remote controller kit are connected.  
2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.  
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.  
– 44 –  
8-1-3. Connection of Both Wired Remote Controller and Wireless Remote Controller Kit  
Indoor unit  
#1 (Master)  
Master wired remote controller  
Wireless remote controller kit  
(Max. 2 units)  
Weekly timer  
Receiver P.C. board  
(MCC-1504)  
Display LED  
Display  
LCD  
Function  
setup  
Display  
LCD  
LCD  
driver  
Receive  
circuit  
Function setup SW  
Grille up/down SW  
Display  
LED  
Key  
MCU  
switch  
Function  
setup  
MCU  
CN2  
CN1  
Buzzer  
MCU  
Key  
switch  
DC5V  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
Power  
circuit  
DC5V  
DC5V  
3  
Power  
circuit  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
Temporary  
operation SW  
Power  
circuit  
Secondary  
battery  
A
B
A
B
#2  
(Follower)  
A
#3  
(Follower)  
A
A
B
B
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)  
DC20V  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
EEPROM  
TA sensor  
TC sensor  
DC5V  
DC12V  
Humidifier output  
Same as left  
Same as left  
TCJ sensor  
Float input  
HA  
Drain  
pump  
2  
2  
Driver  
MCU  
Auto grille  
panel  
Outside  
output  
Indoor  
MCU  
fan motor  
Serial send/  
receive circuit  
Run  
Warning  
Defrost  
Thermo. ON  
COOL  
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
synchronous  
signal input circuit  
HEAT  
FAN  
Power circuit  
DC280V  
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit  
Outdoor unit  
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
(Option)  
Outdoor unit  
TCC-LINK  
adapter P.C. board  
(MCC-1440)  
Up to 8 units are connectable. 1  
1 However Max.7 units are connectable in case of mounting network adapter.  
TCC-LINK  
Central controller  
(Option)  
U3  
U4  
TCC-LINK  
communication circuit  
2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.  
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.  
3 Connection of the weekly timer to the sub remote controller is unavailable.  
4 In the left system, set the wireless remote controller side as the follower  
remote controller when using the wired remote controller as the master  
remote controller.  
– 45 –  
8-2. Indoor Controls (Slim DuctType)  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
1) Distinction of outdoor unit  
Remarks  
1
When power  
supply is reset  
When the power supply is reset, the outdoors are distin-  
guished and the control is selected according to the  
distinguished result.  
2) Setting of indoor fan speed and existence of air direction  
adjustment  
Based on EEPROM data, select setting of the indoor fan  
speed and the existence of air direction adjustment.  
Air speed (rpm)/  
Air direction adjustment  
2
Operation  
mode selection  
1) Based on the operation mode selecting command from the  
remote controller, the operation mode is selected.  
Remote controller  
Control outline  
command  
STOP  
FAN  
Air conditioner stops.  
Fan operation  
COOL  
DRY  
Cooling operation  
Dry operation  
HEAT  
AUTO  
Heating operation  
Ta: Room temp.  
Ts: Setup temp.  
To: Outside temp.  
• COOL/HEAT operation mode is  
automatically selected by Ta, Ts  
and To for operation.  
• The operation is performed as  
shown in the following figure  
according to Ta value at the first  
time only. (In the range of Ts +  
α –1 < Ta < Ts + α + 1, Cooling  
thermo. OFF (Fan)/Setup air  
volume operation continues.)  
Cooling  
operation  
+1.0  
Cooling thermo. OFF (Fan)  
• Setup air volume  
Ta  
(˚C)  
Ts + α  
-1.0  
Heating  
operation  
α is corrected according to the outside temperature.  
Outside temp.  
No To  
Correction value (a)  
0K  
–1K  
0K  
k = deg  
To 24°C  
24 > To 18°C  
To < 18°C  
To error  
+1K  
0K  
3
Room temp.  
control  
1) Adjustment range: Remote controller setup temperature (°C)  
COOL/DRY  
18 to 29  
HEAT  
AUTO  
18 to 29  
17 to 27  
Wired type  
18 to 29  
16 to 30  
Wireless type  
18 to 30  
– 46 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
Shift of suction  
temperature in heating  
operation  
3
Room temp.  
control  
(Continued)  
2) Using the Item code 06, the setup temperature in heating  
operation can be corrected.  
Setup data  
0
2
4
6
Setup temp. correction  
+0°C  
+2°C  
+4°C  
+6°C  
Setting at shipment  
Setup data  
2
4
Automatic  
capacity control  
1) Based on the difference between Ta and Ts, the operation  
frequency is instructed to the outdoor unit.  
2) Cooling operation  
(GA control)  
Every 90 seconds, the room temperature difference  
between temperature detected by Ta and Ts and the  
varied room temperature value are calculated to obtain  
the correction value of the frequency command and then  
the present frequency command is corrected.  
Ta (n) – Ts (n) : Room temp. difference  
n
: Counts of detection  
Ta (n-1) – Ts (n) : Varied room temp. value  
n – 1 Counts of detection of 90 seconds before  
3) Heating operation  
:
Every 1 minute (60 sec.), the room temperature differ-  
ence between temperature detected by Ta and Ts and the  
varied room temperature value are calculated to obtain  
the correction value of the frequency command and then  
the present frequency command is corrected.  
Ts (n) – Ta (n)  
n
: Room temp. difference  
: Counts of detection  
Ta (n) – Ta (n – 1): Varied room temp. value  
n – 1  
: Counts of detection of 1 minute before  
4) Dry operation  
The frequency correction control is same as those of the  
cooling operation.  
However the maximum frequency is limited to approxi-  
mately “S6”.  
Note) When LOW is set up, the maximum frequency is  
limited to approximately “SB”.  
5
Automatic  
cooling/heating  
control  
1) The judgment of selecting COOL/HEAT is carried out as  
shown below. When +1.5 exceeds against Tsh 10 minutes  
and after thermo.-OFF, heating operation (Thermo. OFF)  
exchanges to cooling operation. Description in the  
Tsc: Setup temp. in  
cooling operation  
Tsh: Setup temp. in  
heating operation  
+ temp. correction of  
room temp. control  
parentheses shows an example of cooling ON/OFF.  
Ta  
(˚C)  
Cooling  
+1.5  
(Cooling ON)  
Tsc  
or  
Tsh  
(Cooling OFF)  
-1.5  
Heating  
When –1.5 lowers against Tsc 10 minutes and after  
thermo. OFF, cooling operation (Thermo. OFF) exchanges  
to heating operation.  
2) For the automatic capacity control after judgment of  
cooling/heating, see Item 4.  
3) For temperature correction of room temp. control in  
automatic heating, see Item 3.  
– 47 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
6
Air speed selection 1) Operation with (HH), (H), (L) or [AUTO] mode is carried  
out by the command from the remote controller.  
HH > H+ > H > L+ >  
L > UL  
2) When the air speed mode [AUTO] is selected, the air  
speed varies by the difference between Ta and Ts.  
<COOL>  
Ta (˚C)  
A
+3.0  
HH  
B
C
+2.5  
+2.0  
+1.5  
+1.0  
+0.5  
Tsc  
(HH)  
H+ (HH)  
H (HH)  
L+ (H+)  
L (H)  
D
E
L (H)  
F
0.5  
L (L+)  
G
• Controlling operation in case when thermo of remote  
controller works is same as a case when thermo of the  
body works.  
• If the air speed has been changed once, it is not changed  
for 3 minutes. However when the air volume is exchanged,  
the air speed changes.  
• When cooling operation has started, select a downward  
slope for the air speed, that is, the high position.  
• If the temperature is just on the difference boundary, the  
air speed does not change.  
• Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic  
cooling operation.  
<HEAT>  
Ta (˚C)  
L (L+)  
(0.5) 1.0  
E
L+ (H)  
(0) Tsh  
H (H+)  
(+0.5) +1.0  
D
H+  
(HH)  
(+1.0) +2.0  
C
HH  
(HH)  
(+1.5) +3.0  
B
A
(+2.0) +4.0  
Value in the parentheses indicates one when thermostat of  
the remote controller works.  
Value without parentheses indicates one when thermostat of  
the body works.  
• If the air speed has been changed once, it is not changed  
for 1 minute. However when the air speed I exchanged, the  
air speed changes.  
• When heating operation has started, select an upward  
slope for the air speed, that is, the high position.  
• If the temperature is just on the difference boundary, the  
air speed does not change.  
• Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic  
heating operation.  
Tc: Indoor heat  
exchanger sensor  
temperature  
• In Tc 60°C, the air speed increases by 1 step.  
– 48 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
6
Air speed  
Slim Duct Type  
selection  
(Continued):  
In case of  
Selection of high static  
pressure type  
Standard  
0
Type 1  
1
Type 3  
3
Type 6  
6
Item code  
[5d]  
Item code:  
Slim Duct Type  
SW501 (1)/(2)  
OFF/OFF  
ON/OFF  
OFF/ON  
ON/ON  
[5d] or selection of high  
static pressure on P.C.  
board SW501  
Tap  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL  
HH  
H+  
H
HH  
H+  
H
HH  
HH  
HH  
HH  
H+  
H
H+  
H
L+  
L+  
HH  
HH  
H+  
H
H+  
H
L+  
LL  
L+  
LL  
H+  
H
H+  
H
L+  
LL  
L+  
LL  
L+  
L
L+  
L
LL  
LL  
LL  
LL  
Slim Duct Type  
SM40  
SM45  
SM56  
Tap  
Revolution speed (rpm)  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
1260  
1180  
1120  
1040  
1020  
990  
1260  
1180  
1120  
1040  
1020  
990  
1320  
1220  
1220  
1220  
1180  
1180  
1180  
1040  
990  
960  
960  
950  
950  
910  
910  
870  
870  
990  
840  
840  
880  
790  
790  
820  
550  
550  
550  
3) In heating operation, the mode changes to [UL] if  
thermostat is turned off.  
4) If Ta 25°C when heating operation has started and when  
defrost operation has been cleared, the air conditioner  
operates with (H) mode or higher mode for 1 minute after  
Tc entered in E zone of cool air discharge preventive  
control (Item 7).  
– 49 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
7
Cool air discharge  
preventive control  
1) In heating operation, the indoor fan is controlled  
In D and E zones, the  
based on the detected temperature of Tc sensor or priority is given to air  
Tcj sensor. As shown below, the upper limit of the  
revolution frequency is restricted.  
volume selection setup  
of remote controller.  
However B zone is assumed as C zone for  
6 minutes and after when the compressor activated.  
In A zone while thermo  
is ON, [PRE-HEAT  
(Heating ready)] is  
displayed.  
In defrost operation, the control value of Tc is  
shifted by 6°C.  
Tc  
(˚C)  
Tcj  
HH  
32  
H
30  
L
E zone  
28  
UL  
D zone  
26  
OFF  
C zone  
B zone  
A zone  
20  
16  
8
Freeze preventive control 1) The cooling operation (including Dry operation) is  
Tcj:  
(Low temperature release)  
performed as follows based on the detected  
temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.  
Indoor heat exchanger  
sensor temperature  
When [J] zone is detected for 6 minutes  
(Following figure), the commanded frequency is  
decreased from the real operation frequency.  
After then the commanded frequency changes  
every 30 seconds while operation is performed in  
[J] zone.  
In [K] zone, time counting is interrupted and the  
operation is held.  
When [ I ] zone is detected, the timer is cleared  
and the operation returns to the normal operation.  
If the commanded frequency becomes S0  
because the operation continues in [J] zone, the  
return temperature A is raised from 5°C to 12°C  
until [ I ] zone is detected and the indoor fan  
operates with [L] mode.  
(˚C)  
A
5
I
K
2
J
In heating operation, the freeze-preventive control  
works if 4-way valve is not exchanged and the  
following conditions are satisfied.  
(However the temperature for J zone dashing  
control is changed from 2°C to –5°C.)  
Tcn:  
Tc temperature when 5  
minutes elapsed after  
activation  
Tc (n – 1):  
<Conditions>  
Tc temperature at start  
time  
• When  
or  
is established 5 minutes after  

activation.  
Tcn Tc (n – 1) – 5  

Tcn < Tc (n – 1) – 1 and Tcn Ta < 5°C  
– 50 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
9
High-temp.  
release control  
1) The heating operation is performed as follows based on the  
detected temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.  
• When [M] zone is detected, the commanded frequency is  
decreased from the real operation frequency. After then  
the commanded frequency changes every 30 seconds  
while operation is performed in [M] zone.  
However this control is  
ignored in case of the  
follower unit of the twin.  
• In [N] zone, the commanded frequency is held.  
• When [L] zone is detected, the commanded frequency is  
returned to the original value by approx. 6Hz every  
60 seconds.  
Tc(˚C)  
Setup at shipment  
M
N
Tcj  
A
B
Control temp. (°C)  
A
B
56 (54)  
52 (52)  
L
NOTE:  
Same status as that  
when “thermostat-OFF”  
(status that the air  
When the operation has started or when Tc or Tcj < 30°C at  
start of the operation or after operation start, temperature is  
controlled between values in parentheses of A and B.  
conditioner enters in the  
room temp. monitor  
mode when the  
temperature reached the  
setup temperature on  
the remote controller)  
10 Drain pump  
control  
1) In cooling operation (including Dry operation), the drain  
pump is usually operated.  
2) If the float switch works while drain pump drives, the  
compressor stops, the drain pump continues the operation,  
and a check code is output.  
Check code [P10]  
3) If the float switch works while drain pump stops, the  
compressor stops and the drain pump operates. If the float  
switch keeps operating for approx. 4 minutes, a check code  
is output.  
11 After-heat  
elimination  
When heating operation stops, in some cases, the indoor fan  
operates with (L) for approx. 30 seconds.  
is displayed.  
– 51 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
In the group  
operation, use this  
control by  
12 HA control  
1) This control is connected to TV control or remote start/  
stop I/F, etc, and start/stop are available by HA signal  
input from the remote position.  
connecting to either  
master or follower  
indoor unit.  
2) This control outputs start/stop status to HA output  
terminal.  
3) I/O specifications conform to JEMA regulations.  
4) This control outputs [Operation OFF (STOP) signal] to HA  
output terminal while self-cleaning works. However selection  
of [Operation ON (Operating) signal] is possible by changing  
[0000 (At shipment)] of Item code (DN) [CC] to [0001].  
In this case, if HA is input during self-clean operation during  
operation of the air conditioner, the self-clean operation is not  
performed. (Unit stops.)  
13 Frequency fixed  
operation (Test run)  
<In case of wired remote controller>  
Command frequency  
is approximately [S7]  
1) When pushing [CHK] button for 4 seconds or more,  
[TEST] is displayed on the display screen and the mode  
enters in Test run mode.  
2) Push [ON/OFF] button.  
3) Using [MODE] button, set the mode to [COOL] or [HEAT].  
• Do not use other mode than [COOL]/[HEAT] mode.  
• During test run operation, the temperature cannot be  
adjusted.  
• An error is detected as usual.  
• A frequency fixed operation is performed.  
4) After the test run, push [ON/OFF] button to stop the  
operation. (Display in the display part is same as the  
procedure in Item 1.)  
5) Push [CHK] button to clear the test run mode.  
([TEST] display in the display part disappears and the  
status returns to the normal stop status.)  
14 Filter sign display  
(Except wireless type)  
1) The operation time of the indoor fan is calculated, the filter  
reset signal is sent to the remote controller when the  
specified time (2500H) has passed, and it is displayed on  
LCD.  
[FILTER  
] goes on.  
It is provided on the  
separately sold type  
TCB-AX21E2.  
2) When the filter reset signal has been received from the  
remote controller, time of the calculation timer is cleared.  
In this case, the measurement time is reset if the  
specified time has passed, and display on LCD  
disappears.  
– 52 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
15 Central control mode 1) Setting at the centerl controller side enables to select the  
selection  
contents which can be operated on the remote controller  
at indoor unit side.  
2) Setup contents  
• 64 line central controller (TCB-SC642TLE2)  
Display at remote  
controller side  
(No display)  
[Individual]: Operated on the remote controller  
(Priority to second pushing)  
[Central 1]: ON/OFF operation cannot be operated on  
the remote controller.  
[Central  
] goes on  
[Central 2]: ON/OFF, mode selection, temp. setup  
operations cannot be operated on the  
remote controller.  
[Central  
] goes on  
[Central 3]: Mode selection and temp. setup operations  
cannot be operated on the remote controller.  
[Central  
[Central  
] goes on  
] goes on  
[Central 4]: Mode selection cannot be operated on the  
remote controller.  
In case of the wireless type, the display lamp does not  
change but the contents are same. If operating an item  
which is prohibited by the central control mode from the  
remote controller, it is notified with the receive sound,  
Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi (5 times).  
16 Energy-saving  
control  
1) Selecting [AUTO] mode enables an energy-saving to be  
operated.  
(In case of connect-  
ing SDI outdoor unit)  
2) The setup temperature is shifted (corrected) in the range  
not to lose the comfort ability according to input values of  
various sensors.  
3) Data (Input value room temp. Ta, Outside temp. To, Air  
volume, Indoor heat exchanger sensor temp. Tc) for  
20 minutes are taken the average to calculate correction  
value of the setup temperature.  
4) The setup temperature is shifted every 20 minutes, and  
the shifted range is as follows.  
In cooling time: +1.5 to – 1.0K  
In heating time: –1.5 to +1.0K  
17 Max. frequency cut  
control  
1) This control is operated by selecting [AUTO] operation mode.  
2) COOL operation mode:  
It is controlled according to the  
following figure if To < 28°C.  
3) HEAT operation mode:  
It is controlled according to the  
following figure if To > 15°C.  
Max. frequency is  
restricted to approximately  
the rated heating frequency  
Ta(˚C)  
Ta(˚C)  
Tsh  
Normal control  
+4  
+3  
3  
Tsc  
4  
Normal control  
Max. frequency is  
restricted to approximately  
the rated cooling frequency  
– 53 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
18 DC motor  
1) When the fan operation has started, positioning of the stator  
and the rotor are performed.  
(Moves slightly with tap sound)  
2) The motor operates according to the command from the  
indoor controller.  
Notes)  
• When the fan rotates while the air conditioner stops due to  
entering of outside air, etc, the air conditioner may operate while  
the fan motor stops.  
Check code [P12]  
• When a fan lock is found, the air conditioner stops, and an error  
is displayed.  
SAVE  
19 Save operation 1) Turn on  
2) During operation of save operation,  
remote controller.  
button on the remote controller.  
Operation and display  
also are unavailable  
on the wired remote  
controller RBC-  
SAVE  
lights on the wired  
3) During save operation, the current release control is performed  
AMT31E and before.  
with the restriction ratio set in EEPROM on the outdoor unit.  
SAVE  
Carry out setting  
operation during stop  
of the unit; otherwise  
the unit stops  
4) The restriction ratio can be set by keeping  
button  
pushed for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.  
5) When validating the save operation, the next operation starts  
with save operation valid because contents are held even  
when operation stops, operation mode changes or power  
supply is reset.  
operation.  
For the setup opera-  
tion, refer to “How to  
set up contents of  
save operation” of  
Installation Manual.  
6) The restriction ratio can be set by changing the setup data of  
Item code (DN) [C2] in the range of 50 to 100%  
(every 1%, Setting at shipment: 75%).  
20 8°C heating/  
Frost protective  
operation  
1) This functional is intended for the cold latitudes and performs  
objective heating operation (8°C heating operation).  
2) This function is valid only for combination with the outdoor  
units (Super Digital Inverter (SDI) 4-series outdoor units).  
In a group connection,  
if there is even one  
combination with other  
unit, “This function is  
not provided.is  
3) Using the indoor DN code [D1] (1 bit), Valid/Invalid of this  
function is set up at the customer’s side.  
The setup by DN code is Invalid [0]/Valid [1] and Invalid [0]  
has been set at the shipment.  
displayed.  
4) This operation is the heating operation which sets 8°C as the  
setup temperature of the target.  
5) This function starts operation by pushing temperature button  
The setup tempera-  
ture jumps from [18]  
to [8].  
during heating operation; besides by pushing  
button  
for 4 seconds or more after temperature reached the minimum  
set temperature.  
6) To stop/release this operation, select and execute one from  
the following operations.  
Push  
button: Heating operation (18°C setting) continues.  

Push [START/STOP] button: Air conditioner stops.  
(Heating 18°C operation at the next start)  
MODE  
Push  
: Other operation mode is selected and the  
ƒ
operation continues.  
7) As the setup temperature is 8°C and the human heating is not  
targeted, the cold air discharge preventive control (Item 7) is  
made invalid to suppress the intermittent operation.  
8) The settings of the air direction and air volume are  
changeable during this operation.  
9) The indoor fan stops to protect the compressor for 2 minutes  
after start of heating operation (Thermo-ON) by this function.  
– 54 –  
Function  
Connector No.  
Pin No.  
Specifications  
Remarks  
Humidifier output is ON when heating operation is performed, when thermostat is on, when the fan is on.  
The setting of Humidifier provided + Drain pump ON is performed by short-circuit of CN70 or from the  
remote controller. (DN [40] = 0001)  
1
2
1
DC12V  
Humidifier output ()  
CN66  
Output (Open collector)  
DC12V  
Setting at shipment: Interlock of ON by indoor unit operation, with OFF by stop operation  
The single operation setting by FAN button on the remote controller is performed on the remote  
controller (DN [31] = 0000 0001)  
Intilation output  
CN32  
CN61  
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
Output (Open collector)  
ON/OFF input  
HA ON/OFF input (J01:YES/NO=Pulse (At shipment from factory) /Static input selection)  
0V  
Remote controller prohibited input  
Operation output (Open collector)  
DC12V  
Permission/Prohibition of remote controller operation stop is performed by input.  
Operation ON (Answer back of HA)  
HA  
Warning output (Open collector)  
DC12V  
Warning output ON  
Defrost output (Open collector)  
ON when outdoor unit is defrosted  
Thermostat ON output (Open collector) ON when real thermostat is on. (Compressor ON)  
Option output  
CN60  
Cooling output (Open collector)  
Heating output (Open collector)  
Fan output (Open collector)  
DC12V  
ON when operation mode is cooling system (COOL, DRY, Cooling/Heating automatic cooling)  
ON when operation mode is heating system (HEAT, Cooling/Heating automatic heating)  
ON when indoor fan is on. (When air cleaner is used) OFF while clean operation is performed.  
Outside error input  
CN80  
CN20  
NC  
Generate the warning code “L30” (continuously for 1 minute) and stop the operation forcibly.  
Outside error input  
DC12V  
Panel operation input  
Panel up output (Open collector)  
Panel down output (Open collector)  
0V  
The grille is controlled according to up/down operation from the remote controller.  
Setting of automatic up/down grille provided is performed on the remote controller.  
(DN [30] = 0000 0001)  
AUTO up/down grille  
()  
Selection of option error input (Protective operation display of device attached to outside) or Humidifier  
setting input (Vaporizing + Drain pump ON)  
Humidifier is set at shipment from factory.  
1
2
FILTER  
Option error /  
Humidifier setting ()  
CN70  
0V  
0V  
Setting of option error input is performed on the remote controller. (DN [2A] = 0002 0001)  
1
2
1
2
1
2
CHK  
Operation check  
This check is used to check indoor operation. (Performs operation of indoor fan “H”, Louver horizontal  
and Drain pump ON without communication with outdoor and remote controller)  
CN71  
CN72  
CN73  
DISP  
Exhibition mode  
Communication is available by indoor unit and remote controller only.  
Indoor unit forced thermostat OFF operation  
0V  
Demand input  
0V  
EXCT  
Demand  
This option is not provided to oversea models.  
Serial send LED  
D15 (Green)  
Sub bus communication LED  
D504 (Green)  
Micro computer operation LED  
D501 (Red)  
Optional power supply  
CN309 (Yellow), AC230V  
Serial receive LED  
D14 (Orange)  
DC fan return  
CN334 (White)  
HA (T10)  
CN61 (Yellow), DC12V  
High ceiling select switch  
SW501  
DC fan output  
CN333 (White)  
Remote controller  
CN41 (Blue), DC20V  
Louver  
CN510 (White),  
DC12V  
Indoor/Outdoor inter-unit cable  
CN67 (Black), AC230V  
Optional output  
CN60 (White), DC12  
Humidifier  
CN66 (White), DC12V  
Fan drive  
CN32 (White), DC12V  
TC sensor  
CN101 (Black), DC5V  
TA sensor  
CN104 (Yellow), DC5V  
TCJ sensor  
CN102 (Red), DC5V  
Filter  
CN70 (White), DC5V  
Float switch  
CN34 (Red), DC12V  
Drain pump  
CN504 (White), DC12V  
EXCT  
CN73 (Red), DC5V  
Remote controller power supply LED  
D403 (Red)  
Automatic up/down grille  
CN20 (Blue), DC12V  
Main bus communication LED  
D503 (Yellow)  
CHK  
Outside error input  
CN80 (Green), DC12V  
CN71 (White), DC5V  
TCC-LINK adapter  
DISP  
CN50 (White), DC12V, 5V CN72 (White), DC5V  
9. OUTDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT  
9-1. Outdoor Controls  
<In case of RAV-SP56 and SP80 models>  
1. PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) control  
1) PMV is controlled between (SP56: 20 to 500, SP80: 30 to 500) pulsed during operation.  
2) In cooling operation, PMV is usually controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and  
TC sensor aiming (SP56: 2 to 5K, SP80: 1 to 4K) as the target value.  
3) In heating operation, PMV is usually controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and  
TE sensor aiming (SP56: –2 to 4K, SP80: 2 to 4K) as the target value.  
4) When the cycle excessively heated in both cooling and heating operation, PMV is controlled by TD sensor.  
The target value is 101°C for both cooling and heating operations in SP56, and 91°C for cooling opera-  
tion and 96°C for heating operation respectively in SP80.  
REQUIREMENT  
A sensor trouble may cause a liquid back-flow or abnormal overheat resulting in excessive shortening of the  
compressor life.  
In a case of trouble on the compressor, be sure to check there is no error in the resistance value or the  
refrigerating cycle of each sensor after repair and then start the operation.  
2. Discharge temperature release control  
1) When the discharge temperature did not fall or the discharge temperature rapidly went up by PMV  
control, this control lowers the operation frequency.  
It subdivides the frequency control up to 0.6Hz to stabilize the cycle.  
2) When the discharge temperature detected an abnormal stop zone, the compressor stops and then  
restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds.  
The error counting is cleared when the operation continued for A minutes. If the error is detected by  
B times without clearing, the error is determined and restarting is not performed.  
The cause is considered as excessively little amount of refrigerant, PMV error or clogging of the cycle.  
3) For displayed contents of error, confirm on the check code list.  
TD [˚C]  
Abnormal stop  
(117) 111  
Frequency normal down  
(107) 109  
Frequency slow down  
(105) 106  
Frequency hold  
(102) 103  
Frequency slow up  
(Up to command)  
(93) 96  
SP56  
SP80  
10  
As command is  
A
B
6
8
SP56 in the parentheses  
4
– 57 –  
3. Outdoor fan control  
Revolution frequency allocation of fan taps [rpm]  
W1  
200  
200  
W2  
250  
230  
W3  
300  
260  
W4  
400  
300  
W5  
480  
340  
W6  
500  
380  
W7  
520  
420  
W8  
560  
460  
W9  
640  
520  
WA  
670  
570  
WB  
700  
600  
WC  
750  
630  
WD  
800  
670  
WE  
880  
710  
WF  
980  
740  
SP56  
SP80  
3-1) Cooling fan control  
<SP56>  
<SP80>  
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor, TO  
sensor and the operation frequency. It is controlled  
by every 1 tap of DC fan control (15 taps).  
The outdoor fan is controlled by TL sensor, TO  
sensor and the operation frequency.  
The outdoor fan is controlled by every 1 tap of DC  
fan control (15 taps).  


Only for 60 seconds after start-up of operation, it is  
fixed by the maximum fan tap corresponded to the  
zone in the following table, and then the fan is  
controlled by temperature of TE sensor.  
Only for 60 seconds after the operation has  
started, the maximum fan tap corresponding to the  
zone in the following table is fixed and then the fan  
is controlled by temperature of TL sensor.  
When temperature of TD sensor became high  
sufficiently, it is controlled so that the fan revolution  
frequency will become higher ignoring TE sensor  
temperature.  
ƒ
TE [˚C]  
+1 tap / 20 sec  
Up to the maximum  
revolution frequency of each zone  
Operation with W1 in case of fan-OFF  
32  
TL [˚C]  
WF tap  
58  
55  
Revolution frequency hold  
+1 tap / 20 sec  
Up to the maximum  
revolution frequency of each zone  
29  
1 tap / 20 sec  
Down to the minimum  
revolution frequency of each zone  
38  
35  
Revolution frequency hold  
TD [˚C]  
1 tap / 20 sec  
Down to the minimum  
Operation  
revolution frequency of each zone  
with WF  
85  
80  
Operation with  
the maximum tap  
of each zone  
75  
65  
Normal fan control  
by TE sensor  
20 Hz  
or lower  
20Hz  
to 45Hz  
45Hz  
or higher  
20 Hz  
or lower  
20Hz  
to 45Hz  
45Hz  
or higher  
Temp. range  
Temp. range  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
W6 WB W7 WE W9 WF  
W5 WA W6 WD W8 WE  
W3 W7 W4 W9 W6 WB  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
W6 WC W8 WE WA WE  
W5 WB W7 WD W9 WD  
W4 W8 W6 WA W8 WC  
W3 W6 W5 W8 W7 WA  
W2 W4 W4 W6 W5 W8  
W2 W3 W3 W5 W4 W6  
OFF OFF OFF W2 OFF W3  
OFF WC OFF WE OFF WE  
38°C TO  
38°C TO  
28°C TO < 38°C  
29°C TO < 38°C  
15°C TO < 29°C  
5°C TO < 15°C  
0°C TO < 5°C  
–4°C TO < 0°C  
TO < –4°C  
15°C TO < 28°C  
5.5°C TO < 15°C W2 W5 W3 W7 W5 W9  
0°C TO < 5.5°C  
–5°C TO < 0°C  
TO < –5°C  
W1 W3 W2 W5 W3 W7  
W1 W2 W1 W3 W2 W4  
OFF OFF OFF OFF W1 W3  
W1 WB W1 WE W1 WF  
TO error  
TO error  
– 58 –  
3-2) Heating fan control  
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor, TO sensor and the operation frequency.  

(Control from minimum W1 to maximum (according to the following table))  
For 3 minutes after the operation has started, the maximum fan tap corresponding to the zone in  
the following table is fixed and then the fan is controlled by temperature of TE sensor.  
When TE 24°C continues for 5 minutes, the  
compressor stops.  
ƒ
TE [˚C]  
It is the same status as the normal THERMO  
OFF without error display.  
2 taps / 20 sec. (Down to W1)  
Stop timer count  
The compressor restarts after approx. 2 minutes  
30 seconds and this intermittent operation is not  
abnormal.  
24  
21  
18  
15  
2 taps / 20 sec. (Down to W1)  
1 tap / 20 sec. (Down to W1)  
Revolution frequency hold  
In case that the status in item  
generates  
ƒ
frequently, stain on filter of the suction part of  
the indoor unit is considered.  
Clean the filter and then restart the operation.  
+1 tap / 20 sec  
(Up to the maximum tap of each zone)  
<SP56>  
<SP80>  
20 Hz  
or lower  
20Hz  
to 45Hz  
45Hz  
or higher  
20 Hz  
or lower  
20Hz  
to 45Hz  
45Hz  
or higher  
Temp. range  
Temp. range  
Max.  
W7  
Max.  
W8  
Max.  
W9  
Max.  
W7  
Max.  
W8  
Max.  
W9  
10°C TO  
5.5°C TO < 10°C  
–5°C TO < 5.5°C  
TO < –5°C  
10°C TO  
WA  
WD  
WE  
WE  
WC  
WE  
WF  
WF  
WE  
WF  
WF  
WF  
5°C TO < 10°C  
–3°C TO < 5°C  
W9  
WB  
WD  
WE  
WF  
WF  
WD  
WE  
WE  
WF  
WF  
WD  
WE  
WF  
WF  
–10°C TO < –3°C  
TO < –10°C  
TO error  
TO error  
4. Coil heating control  
1) This control function heats the compressor by turning on the stopped compressor instead of a case heater.  
It purposes to prevent stagnation of the refrigerant inside of the compressor.  
2) As usual, turn on power of the compressor for the specified time before a test run after installation;  
otherwise a trouble of the compressor may be caused.  
As same as a test run, it is recommended to turn on power of the compressor beforehand when starting  
operation after power of the compressor has been interrupted and left as it is for a long time.  
3) SP80 judgment for electricity is performed by TD and TO sensors.  
If TO sensor is defective, a backup control is automatically performed by TE sensor.  
For a case of defective TO sensor, judge it with outdoor LED display.  
Using TD sensor and TE sensor, SP56 judges the power-on.  
4) For every model, the power is turned off when TD is 30°C or more.  
– 59 –  
<SP56>  
Power-ON condition TD < 30˚C  
TE [˚C]  
(Normal time)  
0
1  
6  
7  
No power  
REQUIREMENT  
Continuous power-ON  
Output [10W or equivalent]  
In some cases, the sound of power-ON may be  
heard. It is not abnormal.  
Continuous power-ON  
Output [20W or equivalent]  
<SP80>  
Power-ON condition TD < 30˚C  
Power-ON condition TD < 30˚C  
(Normal time)  
(In defective TO sensor)  
TO  
TE  
18˚C  
20˚C  
No power  
No power  
15˚C  
10˚C  
8˚C  
18˚C  
Intermittent power-ON  
10 minutes: ON /  
Intermittent power-ON  
10 minutes: ON /  
12˚C  
5 minutes: OFF  
5 minutes: OFF  
Output [40W or equivalent]  
Output [40W or equivalent]  
10˚C  
Continuous power-ON  
Output [40W or equivalent]  
Continuous power-ON  
Output [40W or equivalent]  
REQUIREMENT  
While heating the coil, the power sound may be heard. However it is not a trouble.  
5. Short intermittent operation preventive control  
1) For 3 to 10 minutes after operation start, in some cases, the compressor does not stop to protect the  
compressor even if receiving the THERMO OFF signal from indoor.  
However it is not abnormal status. (The operation continuance differs according to the operation status.)  
2) When the operation stops by the remote controller, the operation does not continue.  
6. Current release control  
No. of revolutions of the compressor is controlled by AC current value detected by the outdoor P.C. board so  
that the input current of the inverter does not exceed the specified value.  
Current [A]  
Frequency down  
SP56  
COOL  
10.80  
SP80  
COOL  
16.0  
Model  
1
HEAT  
HEAT  
Hold  
Hold  
I1 value [A]  
13.05  
20.0  
11.0  
Normal operation  
– 60 –  
7. Current release value shift control  
1) This control purposes to prevent troubles of  
the electronic parts such as the compressor  
driving elements and the compressor during  
cooling operation.  
Current release control value (I1)  
[A]  
Temperature range  
SP56  
7.80  
7.80  
9.30  
10.80  
7.80  
SP80  
2) The current release control value (I1) is  
selected from the following table according to  
TO sensor value.  
50°C TO  
45°C TO < 50°C  
39°C TO < 45°C  
TO < 39°C  
9.5  
9.5  
13.0  
16.0  
9.5  
TO error  
8. Over-current protective control  
1) When the over-current protective circuit detected an abnormal current, stop the compressor.  
2) The compressor restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds as setting [1] as an error count.  
3) When the error count [8] was found, determine an error and restart operation is not performed.  
4) For the error display contents, confirm on the check code list.  
9. High-pressure release control <SP80 only>  
1) The operation frequency is controlled to restrain abnormal rising of high pressure by TL sensor in  
cooling operation and TC sensor in heating operation.  
2) When TL sensor in cooling operation or TC sensor in heating operation detects abnormal temperature of  
the stop zone, stop the compressor and the error count becomes +1.  
3) When the compressor stopped with 2), the operation restarts from the point of the normal operation  
zone (e point or lower) where it returned after 2 minutes 30 seconds.  
4) The error count when the compressor stopped with 2) is cleared after the operation continued for  
10 minutes.  
If the error count becomes [10] without clearing, the error is determined and reactivation is not performed.  
5) For the error display contents, confirm on the check code list.  
HEAT TC / COOL TL  
HEAT  
TC  
COOL  
TL  
[˚C]  
Abnormal stop  
Frequency normal down  
Frequency slow down  
Frequency hold  
a
a
b
c
d
e
61°C  
56°C  
54°C  
52°C  
48°C  
63°C  
62°C  
60°C  
58°C  
54°C  
b
c
d
e
Frequency slow up (Up to command)  
As command is  
– 61 –  
10. Defrost control  
<SP56 only>  
1) In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor satisfies any condition in A zone to D  
zone.  
2) During defrosting operation, it finishes if TE sensor continued 12°C or continued 5°C £ TE < 12°C for  
80 seconds. The defrost operation also finishes when it continued for 15 minutes even if TE sensor tem-  
perature was 5°C or lower.  
3) After defrost operation was reset, the compressor stopped for approx. 40 seconds and then the heating  
operation starts.  
Start of heating operation  
TE [˚C]  
[min.]  
0
10 15  
29 35  
91  
4  
6  
A zone  
10  
B zone  
D zone  
25  
C zone  
The minimum TE value and To value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started are  
stored in memory as TE0 and To0, respectively.  
In normal To  
In abnormal To  
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) 3°C  
When status (TE0 – TE) 3°C  
A zone  
B zone  
continued for 20 seconds  
continued for 20 seconds  
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) 2.5°C  
When status (TE0 – TE) 2.5°C  
continued for 20 seconds  
continued for 20 seconds  
C zone  
D zone  
When the status (TE –26°C) continued for 20 seconds  
When the status (TE –10°C) continued for 20 seconds  
– 62 –  
<SP80 only>  
1) In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor satisfies any condition in A zone to D  
zone.  
2) During defrosting operation, it finishes if TE sensor continued 12°C or higher for 3 seconds or continued  
7°C TE < 12°C for 1 minute. The defrost operation also finishes when it continued for 10 minutes even if  
TE sensor temperature was 7°C or lower.  
3) After defrost operation was reset, the compressor stopped for approx. 40 seconds and then the heating  
operation starts.  
Start of heating operation  
TE [˚C]  
[min.]  
0
10  
15  
39  
45  
55  
d
2  
5  
A zone  
10  
D zone  
B zone  
25  
C zone  
The minimum TE value and To value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started are  
stored in memory as TE0 and To0, respectively.  
In normal To  
In abnormal To  
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) 3°C  
When status (TE0 – TE) 3°C  
A zone  
B zone  
continued for 20 seconds  
continued for 20 seconds  
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) 2°C  
When status (TE0 – TE) 2°C  
continued for 20 seconds  
continued for 20 seconds  
C zone  
D zone  
When the status (TE –25°C) continued for 20 seconds  
When compressor operation status of TE < –2°C is calculated as d minutes  
4) The time of above d can be changed by  
exchanging jumper [J805] and [J806] of the  
outdoor control P.C. board.  
J805  
J806  
d
150 minutes  
Setting at shipment  
¡
¡
(Setting at shipment: 150 minutes)  
90 minutes  
60 minutes  
30 minutes  
¡
×
×
×
¡
×
: Short circuit, : Open  
¡
×
11. Compressor protective control <SP80 only>  
1) This control purposes to raise the operation frequency until 45Hz for 2 minutes in order to protect the  
compressor (Prevention of oil accumulation in the refrigerating cycle) when the status that the operation  
frequency is 45Hz or less has continued for 10 hours was calculated. The operation frequency follows  
the normal indoor command after controlling.  
2) Although the compressor may stop by THERMO-OFF control when the room temperature varies and  
then attains the set temperature by this control, it is not abnormal.  
3) During this control works, if stopping the operation by the remote controller, the operation does not continue.  
– 63 –  
<In case of RAV-SP40 and SP45 models>  
1. Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) control  
1) For PMV with 50 to 500 pulses during operation, respectively.  
2) In cooling operation, PMV is controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and TC sensor.  
3) In heating operation, PMV is controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and TE sensor.  
4) For the temperature difference in items 2) and 3), 1 to 5K is aimed as the target in both cooling and  
heating operations.  
5) When the cycle excessively rose in both cooling and heating operations, PMV is controlled by TD sensor.  
The aimed value is usually 106°C in both cooling and heating operations.  
REQUIREMENT  
A sensor trouble may cause a liquid back-flow or abnormal overheat resulting in excessive shortening of the  
compressor life. In a case of trouble on the compressor, be sure to check there is no error in the resistance  
value an the refrigerating cycle of each sensor after repair and then start the operation.  
2. Discharge temperature release control  
1) This function controls the operation  
frequency, that is, lowers the operation  
TD [˚C]  
frequency when the discharge temperature  
has not lower or the discharge temperature  
has rapidly risen during PMV control.  
Error stop  
(P03display with 8 times error count)  
It subdivides the frequency control up to a  
unit of 0.6 Hz to stabilize the cycle.  
2) When the discharge temperature is detected  
in an abnormal stop zone, the unit stops the  
compressor and restarts after 2 minutes  
30 seconds.  
117  
Frequency down  
107  
103  
100  
93  
Frequency slow-down  
Frequency holding  
The error counter is cleared when it has  
continued the operation for 6 minutes.  
Frequency slow-up  
(Up to command)  
If the abnormal stop zone has been detected  
by 8 times without clearing of counter, an  
error “P03” is displayed.  
The cause is considered as excessively  
little amount of refrigerant, defective PMV,  
or clogging of cycle.  
As command is  
3. Current release control  
Current [A]  
The output frequency and the output voltage are  
controlled by AC current value detected by T02  
on the outdoor P.C. board so that input current of  
the inverter does not exceed the specified value.  
Frequency down  
I1  
Hold  
SP40, SP45  
Hold  
Normal operation  
I10.5  
Objective model  
COOL  
HEAT  
I1 value [A]  
10.13  
10.50  
– 64 –  
4. Outdoor fan control  
Allocations of fan tap revolutions [rpm]  
W1  
W2  
W3  
W4  
W5  
W6  
W7  
W8  
W9  
WA  
WB WC WD  
WE  
WF  
SP40, SP45  
200 300 350 410 480 500 560 640 670 700 750 800 800 840 840  
1) Cooling fan control  
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE, TD, and TO sensors and also revolution frequency of the operation.  

The outdoor is controlled by every 1 tap of DC fan control (15 taps).  
Only during 60 seconds after the operation has started, the fan is fixed with the maximum fan tap  
which corresponds to the zone in the following table.  
After then the fan is controlled by TE sensor temperature.  
Considering a case that TE sensor has come out of the holder, the fan is controlled so that revolution  
frequency of the fan increases regardless of TE if temperature of TD sensor has risen.  
ƒ
Operation with WE  
TE [˚C]  
TD [˚C]  
WF”  
+1 tap/20 seconds  
rpm hold  
85  
80  
75  
65  
32  
29  
Operation with  
maximum tap in  
each zone  
1 tap/20 seconds  
Usual fan control  
f < 34.1Hz  
Min.  
34.1Hz f < 58.6Hz  
58.6Hz f  
Temp. range  
Max.  
WB  
WA  
W7  
W5  
W3  
W2  
Min.  
W8  
W7  
W5  
W4  
W3  
W2  
OFF  
W1  
Max.  
WD  
WC  
W9  
W7  
W5  
W4  
W3  
WF  
Min.  
Max.  
WF  
WF  
WB  
W9  
W7  
W5  
W4  
WF  
38°C TO  
W6  
W5  
W3  
W2  
W1  
W1  
WA  
W9  
W7  
W6  
W4  
W3  
W1  
W1  
32 TO < 38°C  
15 TO < 32°C  
5 TO < 15°C  
1 TO < 5°C  
–5 TO < 1°C  
TO < –5°C  
OFF  
TO error  
W1  
WF  
– 65 –  
2) Heating fan control  
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor, TO sensor and the operation frequency.  

(From Min. W1 to Max. are controlled according to the following table.)  
During 3 minutes after start-up, the fan is fixed  
with the maximum fan tap corresponding to zone  
in the following table.  
TE [˚C]  
After then the fan is controlled by temperature of  
TE sensor.  
2 tap/20 seconds  
STOP timer count  
24  
If status, TE > 24°C continues for 5 minutes, the  
ƒ
2 tap/20 seconds  
1 tap/20 seconds  
rpm hold  
operation stops.  
21  
This status is same to the usual Thermo-OFF  
which has no alarm display, and the fan restarts  
after 2 minutes and 30 seconds.  
18  
This intermittent operation is not abnormal.  
15  
When the above status  
occurs frequently, it is  
+1 tap/20 seconds  
considered that the filter of suction part of the  
indoor unit is stain.  
Clean the filter and then restart the operation.  
Temp. range  
10°C TO  
f < 38.9Hz  
38.9Hz f < 67.6Hz  
67.6Hz f  
W7  
WA  
WE  
WE  
WE  
W8  
WB  
WF  
WF  
WF  
W9  
WD  
WF  
WF  
WF  
5 TO < 10°C  
–5 TO < 5°C  
TO < –5°C  
Maximum  
TO error  
5. Coil heating control  
1) This control function heats the compressor by turning on the stopped compressor instead of a case heater.  
It purposes to prevent slackness of the refrigerant inside of the compressor.  
2) As usual, turn on power of the compressor for the specified time before a test run after installation,  
otherwise a trouble of the compressor may be caused.  
As same as a test run, it is recommended to turn on power of the compressor beforehand when starting  
operation after power of the compressor has been interrupted for a long time.  
3) Coil heating is controlled by TD and TE sensor.  
4) The power is turned off when TD is 30°C or more.  
TE [˚C]  
No power-ON  
0
SP40, SP45  
1  
Continuous ON (L)  
6  
7  
L
10W and equivalent  
30W and equivalent  
H
Continuous ON (H)  
– 66 –  
6. Defrost control  
In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor temperature satisfies any condition  

in A zone to C zone.  
The defrost operation is immediately finished if TE sensor temperature has become 12°C or more, or it  
also is finished when condition of 5°C < TE < 12°C has continued for 80 seconds.  
The defrost operation is also finished when defrost operation has continued for 15 minutes even if TE  
sensor temperature has become 5°C or lower.  
After defrost operation has finished, the compressor and the outdoor fan start heating operation after  
stopped for approx. 40 seconds.  
ƒ
Start of heating operation  
0
10  
15  
29  
35  
[min.]  
TE [˚C]  
4  
A zone  
6  
10  
D zone  
B zone  
C zone  
25  
*
The minimum TE value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started is stored in memory  
as TE0.  
A zone  
B zone  
C zone  
Defrost operation is performed in this zone when TE0-TE > 2.5 continued for 20 seconds.  
Defrost operation is performed in this zone when TE0-TE > 3 continued for 20 seconds.  
Defrost operation is performed when this zone continued for 20 seconds.  
– 67 –  
F01, 02, 25A fuse  
Lead wire for grounding  
(Black)  
DB02:  
High power factor diode  
Q404:  
High power factor circuit IGBT  
C12, 13, 14  
electrrolytiic capaacitor  
F03: 3.15A fuse  
DB01:  
Single-phase rectifier diode  
L-phase power supply lead  
(Black)  
N-phase power supply lead  
(White)  
Serial lead (Orange)  
Reactor lead connector  
(White)  
CN701:  
4-way valve connector  
RY701:  
4-way valve relay  
CN300:  
Fan motor connector  
CN602:  
Outdoor temperature  
(TO) sensor connector  
12V  
5V  
GND  
CN806:  
Optional connector  
CN600:  
Heat exchange temperature  
(TE) sensor connector  
IC800: MCU  
CN603:  
Suction temperature  
(TS) sensor connector  
Comp. lead  
(Red) (White) (Black)  
CN601:  
Discharge temperature  
(TD) sensor connector  
CN500:  
Fan drive circuit  
Case thermo  
Q300 to Q305:  
connector  
FET (QTY: 6P)  
Comp. drive circuit  
Q200 to Q205: IGBT (QTY: 6P)  
IC200: Drive IC (QTY: 1P)  
CN700:  
PMV connector  
CN605:  
Sub SW board connector  
J800 to 803, 806  
Model switch jumper line  
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
<MCC-1571>  
Fan motor output  
CN300 (White)  
Compressor output terminals  
CN202  
CN201  
CN200  
Power circuit protective fuse  
F100 (250V, 3.15A plastic case)  
4-way valve connector  
CN701 (White)  
Electrolytic capacitors  
Case thermo connector  
CN609 (Blue)  
Compressor ON  
output connector  
CN704 (Blue)  
Heater output connector  
CN703 (Gray)  
Reactor connecting  
connectors  
Optional input connector  
CN610 (Yellow)  
Specific operation SW  
SW801  
SW804  
Lead wire for grounding  
P09 (Black)  
Display exchange SW  
SW800  
SW803  
Power supply protective fuse  
F01 (250V, 25A)  
Temp. sensor connector  
Power supply connecting lead wire  
P01 (Red)  
P02 (White)  
TL CN604 (White)  
TD CN603 (White)  
TO CN602 (Yellow)  
TE CN601 (White)  
TS CN600 (White)  
Power, Alarm display LED  
D800 to 804 (Yellow)  
D805 (Green)  
Initial set SW  
SW802  
PMV connector  
CN710 (White)  
Inter-unit wire connector  
CN04 (White)  
4-way valve protective fuse  
F700 (250V, 3.15A, plastic case)  
Inter-unit wire protective fuse  
F03 (250V, 10A)  
Indoor/Outdoor communication signal LED  
D503 (Green, Outdoor Indoor)  
D502 (Orange, Indoor Outdoor)  
– 69 –  
10. TROUBLESHOOTING  
10-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting  
<Wired remote controller type>  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+
and  
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, push pins for reset switch  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
a) The following operations are normal.  
1. Compressor does not operate.  
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup  
temperature?  
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?  
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.  
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
3. Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.  
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
• Is not defrost operation performed?  
4. ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
• Is not automatic address being set up?  
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the  
operation cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)  
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?  
b) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  
c) Are connecting cables of indoor unit and remote controller correct?  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Trouble  
Confirmation of check code display  
Check defective position and parts.  
NOTE :  
For cause of a trouble, power conditions or malfunction/erroneous diagnosis of microcomputer due to outer  
noise is considered except the items to be checked. If there is any noise source, change the cables of the  
remote controller to shield cables.  
– 70 –  
<Wireless remote controller type>  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+
and  
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, etc.  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
a) The following operations are normal.  
1. Compressor does not operate.  
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup  
temperature?  
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?  
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.  
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
3) Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.  
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
• Is not defrost operation performed?  
4) ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
• Is not forced operation performed?  
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
• Is not automatic address being set up?  
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?  
a) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  
b) Are connecting cables between indoor unit and receiving unit correct?  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the operation  
cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Confirmation of lamp display  
Check defective  
(When 4-way air discharge cassette type  
wireless remote controller is connected)  
Trouble  
position and parts.  
1) Outline of judgment  
The primary judgment to check where a trouble occurred in indoor unit or outdoor unit is performed with  
the following method.  
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of indoor unit  
(sensors of the receiving unit)  
The indoor unit monitors operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of  
self-diagnosis are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.  
– 71 –  
10-2. Troubleshooting  
10-2-1. Outline of judgment  
The primary judgment to check whether a trouble occurred in the indoor unit or outdoor unit is carried out with  
the following method.  
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of the indoor unit  
(sensors of the receiving part)  
The indoor unit monitors the operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of self-diagnosis  
are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.  
: Go off,  
: Go on,  
: Flash (0.5 sec.)  
Lamp indication  
Check code  
Cause of trouble occurrence  
Operation Timer Ready  
Power supply OFF or miswiring between receiving unit and indoor unit  
No indication at all  
E01  
E02  
E03  
E08  
E09  
E10  
Receiving error  
Receiving unit  
Miswiring or wire connection error  
Sending error  
between receiving unit and indoor unit  
Communication stop  
Operation Timer Ready  
Flash  
Duplicated indoor unit No.  
Setup error  
Duplicated master units of remote controller  
Communication error between CPUs on indoor unit P.C. board  
Wire connection error between indoor units, Indoor power OFF  
(Communication stop between indoor master and follower or between main  
and sub indoor twin)  
E18  
E04  
Operation Timer Ready  
Miswiring between indoor unit and outdoor unit or connection erorr  
(Communication stop between indoor and outdoor units)  
Flash  
Operation Timer Ready  
P10  
P12  
Overflow was detected.  
Protective device of indoor unit worked.  
Indoor DC fan error  
Alternate flash  
P03  
P04  
P05  
P07  
P15  
P19  
P20  
P22  
P26  
P29  
Outdoor unit discharge temp. error  
Outdoor high pressure system error  
Protective device of  
outdoor unit worked.  
1  
Power supply voltage error  
Heat sink overheat error  
Gas leak detection error  
Outdoor unit error  
Operation Timer Ready  
Alternate flash  
4-way valve system error (Indoor or outdoor unit judged.)  
Outdoor unit high pressure protection  
Outdoor fan system error  
Protective device of  
outdoor unit worked.  
Short-circuit error of compressor driving device  
Position detection circuit error  
1  
Stopped because of error of other indoor unit in a group  
(Check codes of E03/L03/L07/L08)  
P31  
1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.  
– 72 –  
Lamp indication  
Check code  
Cause of trouble occurrence  
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error  
Operation Timer Ready  
F01  
F02  
P10  
Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error  
Heat exchanger sensor (TA) error  
Indoor unit sensor error  
Alternate flash  
F04  
F06  
F07  
F08  
F12  
F13  
F15  
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error  
Temp. sensor (TE) error  
Operation Timer Ready  
Alternate flash  
Temp. sensor (TL) error  
Temp. sensor (TO) error  
Sensor error of outdoor unit  
1  
Temp. sensor (TS) error  
Temp. sensor (TH) error  
Temp. Sensor miswiring (TE, TS)  
Operation Timer Ready  
F29  
F31  
Indoor EEPROM error  
Outdoor EEPROM error  
Simultaneous flash  
Operation Timer Ready  
Simultaneous flash  
H01  
H02  
H03  
H04  
L03  
L07  
L08  
L09  
Compressor break down  
Compressor lock  
Operation Timer Ready  
Outdoor compressor system error 1  
Current detection circuit error  
Case thermostat worked.  
Flash  
Duplicated master indoor units  
There is indoor unit of group connection AUTO address  
Operation Timer Ready  
in individual indoor unit.  
If group construction and  
Unsetting of group address  
Missed setting  
(Unset indoor capacity)  
address are not normal  
when power supply turned on,  
automatically goes to address  
setup mode.  
Simultaneous flash  
L10  
L20  
L29  
L30  
Operation Timer Ready  
Unset model type (Service board)  
Duplicated indoor central addresses  
Others  
Other error of outdoor unit  
Outside interlock error  
Simultaneous flash  
1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.  
– 73 –  
10-2-2. Others (Other than Check Code)  
Lamp indication  
Check code  
Cause of trouble occurrence  
Operation Timer Ready  
During test run  
Simultaneous flash  
Operation Timer Ready  
Disagreement of cool/heat  
(Automatic cool/heat setting to automatic cool/heat prohibited model, or  
setting of heating to cooling-only model)  
Alternate flash  
– 74 –  
10-2-3. Check Code List (Indoor)  
: Go on,  
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED  
: Flash, l : Go off  
¡
¥
(Indoor unit detected)  
Check code indication  
Sensor lamp indication  
Block indication  
Air conditioner operation  
Representative defective position  
Explanation of error contents  
TCC-LINK central &  
Wired remote controller  
Automatic  
reset  
Operation  
continuation  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
Regular communication error between indoor and  
remote controller  
No communication from remote controller and network adapter  
(Also no communication from central control system)  
E03  
¥
¡
×
l
l
E04  
E08  
E10  
Indoor/Outdoor serial error  
There is error on serial communication between indoor and outdoor units  
Same address as yours was detected.  
¥
l
l
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
l
¥
¥
l
l
l
Duplicated indoor addresses  
²
Communication error between indoor MCU  
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer  
Regular communication error between  
indoor master and follower units  
Regular communication between indoor master and follower units is impossible,  
Communication between twin master (main) and follower (sub) units is impossible.  
E18  
¥
¡
×
l
l
F01  
F02  
F10  
F29  
L03  
L07  
L08  
L09  
L20  
L30  
P01  
P10  
P12  
P19  
P31  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TCJ) error  
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TC) error  
Indoor unit, Room temp. sensor (TA) error  
Indoor unit, other indoor P.C. board error  
Duplicated setting of indoor group master unit  
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.  
Unset indoor group address  
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TCJ).  
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TC).  
Open/short was detected on room temp. sensor (TA).  
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.  
There are multiple master units in a group.  
²
²
²
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit.  
Indoor group address is unset.  
Unset indoor capacity  
Capacity of indoor unit is unset.  
Duplicated central control system address  
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)  
Indoor unit, AC fan error  
Duplicated setting of central control system address  
Abnormal stop by outside error (CN80) input  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
An error of indoor AC fan was detected. (Fan motor thermal relay worked.)  
Float switch worked.  
Indoor unit, overflow detection  
Indoor unit, DC fan error  
Indoor DC fan error (Over-current/Lock, etc.) was detected.  
In heating operation, an error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger sensor.  
Follower unit in group cannot operate by warning from [E03/L03/L07/L08] of master unit.  
4-way valve system error  
Other indoor unit error  
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.  
²
(Remote controller detected)  
Check code indication  
Sensor lamp indication  
Block indication  
Air conditioner operation  
Representative defective position  
Explanation of error contents  
Automatic  
reset  
Operation  
continuation  
Wired remote controller  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
No master remote controller, Remote controller  
communication (Receive) error  
Signal cannot be received from indoor unit. Master remote controller was not set.  
(including 2 remote controllers)  
E01  
E02  
E09  
×
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
Remote controller communication (Send) error  
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.  
¥
¥
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master. (Indoor master unit stops warning  
and follower unit continues operation.)  
Duplicated master remote controller  
(Central control devices detected)  
Check code indication  
Sensor lamp indication  
Block indication  
Air conditioner operation  
Representative defective position  
Explanation of error contents  
Automatic  
reset  
Operation  
continuation  
TCC-LINK central  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
Signal sending operation of central control system is impossible.  
There are multiple same central devices. (AI-NET)  
Is not displayed.  
(Common use of  
C05  
C06  
C12  
Central control system communication (send) error  
Central control system communication (receive) error  
General-purpose device control interface batched warning  
remote controller, etc.)  
Signal receiving operation of central control system is impossible.  
An error on device connected to general-purpose device control interface of exclusive to  
TCC-LINK/AI-NET  
By warning unit  
(Above-mentioned)  
Group follower unit is defective.  
(For remote controller, above-mentioned [∗∗∗] details are displayed with unit No.  
P30  
Group follower unit is defective.  
NOTE: Even for the same contents of error such as communication error, the display of check code may differ according to detection device.  
When remote controller or central controller detects an error, it is not necessarily related to operation of the air conditioner. In this list, the check codes that outdoor unit detects are not described.  
Check Code List (Outdoor)  
: Go on,  
: Flash, l : Go off  
¡
¥
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED  
Sensor lamp part  
Remote  
Automatic  
reset  
Operation  
continuation  
controller  
indication  
Block indication  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
ALT  
Representative defective position  
Detection  
Explanation of error contents  
Open/Short of discharge temp. sensor was detected.  
F04  
F06  
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TE, TS, TL) error  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.  
Miswiring between TE sensor and TS sensor  
ALT  
F08  
F07  
F12  
F13  
F15  
F31  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
SIM  
Outdoor unit Outside temp. sensor (TO) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TL) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TS) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TH) error  
Outdoor unit Misconnection of temp. sensor (TE, TS)  
Outdoor unit EEPROM error  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Open/Short of outside temp. sensor was detected.  
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
×
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.  
Open/Short of suction temp. sensor was detected.  
Open/Short of heat sink temp. sensor (Board installed) was detected.  
Misconnection of outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor and suction temp. sensor was detected.  
Outdoor P.C. board part (EEPROM) error was detected.  
When reached min-Hz by current release control, short-circuited current (Idc) after  
DC excitation was detected.  
H01  
Outdoor unit Compressor break down  
×
×
¥
l
l
H02  
H03  
H04  
L10  
Outdoor unit Compressor lock  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Compressor lock was detected.  
¥
¥
¥
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
l
l
l
¥
l
l
l
¥
Outdoor unit Current detection circuit error  
Outdoor unit Case thermostat operation  
Outdoor unit Setting error of service P.C. board type  
Current detection circuit error  
Case thermostat operation was detected.  
SIM  
SIM  
When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type select jumper setting was inappropriate.  
1) Defective parts on outdoor P.C. board (MCU communication, EEPROM, TH sensor error)  
2) When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type selection was inappropriate.  
3) Other error (Heat sink abnormal overheat, gas leak, 4-way valve inverse error) was detected.  
L29  
Outdoor unit Other outdoor unit error  
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. error  
Outdoor  
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¡
¥
P03  
P04  
ALT  
ALT  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Error was detected by discharge temp. release control.  
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
Outdoor unit  
When case thermostat worked, error was detected by high release control from indoor/  
outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor. Power supply voltage error  
High pressure system error, Power supply voltage error  
P05  
P07  
P15  
P20  
P22  
P26  
P29  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
Power supply error  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Power supply voltage error  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Outdoor unit Heat sink overheat  
Gas leak detection  
Abnormal overheat was detected by outdoor heat sink temp. sensor.  
Abnormal overheat of discharge temp. or suction temp. was detected.  
Error was detected by high release control from indoor/outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor.  
Error (Over-current, lock, etc.) was detected on outdoor fan drive circuit.  
Short-circuited protective operation of compressor drive circuit element (G-Tr /IGBT) worked.  
Position detection error of compressor motor was detected.  
Outdoor unit High pressure system error  
Outdoor unit Outdoor fan error  
Outdoor unit Inverter Idc operation  
Outdoor unit Position detection error  
No remote controller master unit  
Remote controller communication error  
Remote  
controller  
Signal was not received from indoor unit.  
Main remote controller was not set. (including 2 remote controllers)  
E01  
E02  
E03  
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
Remote  
controller  
Remote controller send error  
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.  
Regular communication error between indoor and  
remote controller  
Indoor  
No communication from remote controller and network adapter  
¡
×
×
l
¥
l
E04  
E08  
Indoor/Outdoor serial error  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Serial communication error between indoor and outdoor  
Same address as yours was detected.  
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
Duplicated indoor addresses  
²
Remote  
controller  
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master.  
(Indoor master unit stops warning and follower unit continues operation.)  
E09  
E10  
E18  
Duplicated main remote controllers  
Communication error between CPU  
×
¡
¡
×
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
Indoor  
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer  
Regular communication error between master and  
follower indoor units  
Regular communication was impossible between master and follower indoor units.  
Communication between twin master (Main unit) and follower (sub unit) was impossible.  
Indoor  
×
L03  
L07  
L08  
L09  
L30  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
Duplicated indoor master units  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
There are multiple master units in a group.  
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit  
Indoor address group was unset.  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
²
²
²
l
l
l
l
¡
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.  
Unset indoor group address  
Unset indoor capacity  
Capacity of indoor unit was unset.  
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)  
Abnormal stop by CN80 outside error input  
Indoor  
Outdoor  
P19  
ALT  
4-way valve inverse error  
In heating operation, error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger or temp. up ofTE, TS.  
¡
×
¥
¥
l
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.  
²
: Go on,  
: Flash, l : Go off  
¡
¥
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED  
Sensor lamp part  
Block indication  
Remote  
controller  
indication  
Automatic  
reset  
Operation  
continuation  
Representative defective position  
Detection  
Explanation of error contents  
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TCJ) was detected.  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
ALT  
F01  
F02  
F10  
F29  
P01  
P10  
P12  
P31  
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error  
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error  
Indoor unit Room temp. sensor (TA) error  
Indoor unit Other indoor P.C. board error  
Indoor unit Indoor fan error  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
ALT  
ALT  
SIM  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TC) was detected.  
Open/Short of room temp. (TA) was detected.  
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.  
Indoor AC fan error was detected. (Fan thermal relay worked.)  
Float switch worked.  
Indoor unit Overflow detection  
Indoor unit Indoor fan error  
Indoor fan error (Over-current / Lock, etc.) was detected.  
Other indoor under condition of warning in group. E03/L07/L03/L08 warning  
Other indoor unit error  
Sub remote controller error in a group  
(Details of remote controller are displayed with unit No. Only central control side is displayed.)  
By unit with warning No.  
ALT  
Error in indoor group  
Network adapter  
Network adapter/  
Center  
Communication error of central control system signal  
Is not displayed on the remote controller  
LAN system communication error  
¡
¡
Network adapter/  
Center  
L20  
SIM  
LAN system communication error  
Duplicated indoor address of central control system communication  
¥
¡
¥
¡
¡
×
¡
There are multiple communication adapters.  
Network adapter  
There are multiple communication adapters on remote controller communication line.  
Error mode detected by indoor unit  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Check  
code  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
1. Check cables of remote controller and communication adapters.  
• Remote controller LCD display OFF (Disconnection)  
• Central remote controller [97] check code  
No communication from remote  
controller (including wireless) and  
communication adapter  
Stop  
Displayed when  
E03  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
The serial signal is not output from  
outdoor unit to indoor unit.  
1. Outdoor unit does not completely operate.  
• Inter-unit wire check, correction of miswiring  
• Check outdoor P.C. board. Correct wiring of P.C. board.  
• Miswiring of inter-unit wire  
Stop  
Displayed when  
E04  
• Defective serial sending circuit on  
outdoor P.C. board  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
2. When outdoor unit normally operates  
Check P.C. board (Indoor receiving / Outdoor sending).  
• Defective serial receiving circuit on  
indoor P.C. board  
E08  
L03  
Duplicated indoor unit address  
Duplicated indoor master unit  
1. Check whether remote controller connection (Group/Individual)  
was changed or not after power supply turned on  
(Finish of group construction/Address check).  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
If group construction and address are not normal when the  
power has been turned on, the mode automatically shifts to  
address setup mode. (Resetting of address)  
Stop  
There is group wire in individual indoor  
unit.  
L07  
L08  
L09  
Unset indoor group address  
Unset indoor capacity  
Displayed when 1. Set indoor capacity (DN=11)  
error is detected  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check outside devices.  
L30  
P10  
Abnormal input of outside interlock  
error is detected  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
1. Trouble of drain pump  
Float switch operation  
Displayed when 2. Clogging of drain pump  
Stop  
• Float circuit, Disconnection,  
Coming-off, Float switch contact error  
error is detected  
3. Check float switch.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
1. Position detection error  
Displayed when 2. Over-current protective circuit of indoor fan driving unit operated.  
P12  
P19  
Indoor DC fan error  
Stop  
Stop  
error is detected  
3. Indoor fan locked.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
1. Check 4-way valve.  
4-way valve system error  
Displayed when 2. Check 2-way valve and check valve.  
• After heating operation has started,  
indoor heat exchangers temp. is  
down.  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
3. Check indoor heat exchanger (TC/TCJ).  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
1. Judge follower unit while master unit is [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08].  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Own unit stops while warning is output  
to other indoor units.  
Displayed when  
(Follower unit)  
error is detected  
(Automatic reset)  
P31  
F01  
F02  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of  
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor  
(TCJ)  
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TCJ).  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of  
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor  
(TC)  
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TC).  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of  
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor  
(TA)  
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TA).  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
F10  
F29  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Indoor EEPROM error  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor EEPROM. (including socket insertion)  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
• EEPROM access error  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Communication error between indoor  
MCU  
1. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
E10  
E18  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
• Communication error between fan  
driving MCU and main MCU  
1. Check remote controller wiring.  
2. Check indoor power supply wiring.  
3. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Regular communication error between  
indoor aster and follower units and  
between main and sub units  
Stop  
Displayed when  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
– 78 –  
Error mode detected by remote controller or central controller (TCC-LINK)  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Check code  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
Power supply error of remote controller, Indoor  
EEPROM error  
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.  
2. Check remote controller.  
No communication with master indoor unit  
• Remote controller wiring is not correct.  
• Power of indoor unit is not turned on.  
• Automatic address cannot be completed.  
Not displayed at all  
(Operation on  
remote controller  
is impossible.)  
3. Check indoor power wiring.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
5. Check indoor EEPROM.  
(including socket insertion)  
Automatic address repeating phenom-  
enon generates.  
Receiving error from remote controller  
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.  
2. Check remote controller.  
No communication with master indoor unit  
Stop  
(Automatic reset)  
E01  
• Disconnection of inter-unit wire between  
remote controller and master indoor unit  
(Detected by remote controller side)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
If center exists,  
2  
3. Check indoor power wiring.  
operation continues.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Sending error of remote controller  
(Automatic reset)  
Signal send error to indoor unit  
(Detected by remote controller side)  
Displayed when 1. Check sending circuit inside of remote  
E02  
If center exists,  
error is detected  
controller.  
operation continues.  
Replace remote controller.  
1. In 2-remote controllers (including wireless),  
there are multiple main units.  
Stop  
(Sub unit  
continues operation.)  
There are multiple main remote controllers.  
(Detected by remote controller side)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
E09  
L20  
Check that there are 1 main remote  
controller and other sub remote controllers.  
1. Check setting of central control system  
network address. (Network adapter SW01)  
Duplicated indoor central addresses on  
communication of central control system  
(Detected by indoor/central controller side)  
Stop  
(Automatic reset)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Central controller  
L20  
2. Check network adapter P.C. board.  
1. Check communication wire / miswiring  
2. Check communication (U3, U4 terminals)  
3. Check network adapter P.C. board.  
3  
Communication circuit error of central  
control system  
(Detected by central controller side)  
Continues  
Displayed when  
Central controller  
(Send)  
4. Check central controller (such as central  
control remote controller, etc.)  
(By remote controller) error is detected  
C05  
(Receive)  
C06  
5. Check terminal resistance. (TCC-LINK)  
Continuation/Stop  
(According  
to each case)  
Indoor Gr sub unit error  
(Detected by central controller side)  
Displayed when Check the check code of the corresponding  
error is detected unit from remote controller.  
Central controller  
P30  
2 The check code cannot be displayed by the wired remote controller.  
(Usual operation of air conditioner becomes unavailable.)  
For the wireless models, an error is notified with indication lamp.  
3 This trouble is related to communication of remote controller (A, B), central system (TCC-LINK U3, U4), and  
[E01], [E02], [E03], [E09] or [E18] is displayed or no check display on the remote controller according to the  
contents.  
– 79 –  
Error mode detected by outdoor unit  
The check code has been ramified from “4 series” and after.  
The ramified check code is displayed only when both the indoor unit and the outdoor unit are “4 series” and after.  
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM804UT-E with RAV-SP804AT-E)  
When the indoor unit is 3 series and before, the conventional check code is displayed.  
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM802BT-E and RAV-SP804AT-E: Outdoor unit only is “4 series”.)  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Check code  
Judgment and measures  
Indoor unit  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
before  
after  
3 series 4 series  
1. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, short-circuit of  
discharge temp. sensor (TD)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
F04  
F06  
F04  
F06  
F07  
F12  
F15  
F08  
Stop  
Stop  
1. Check temp. sensor (TE).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, or short-circuit of  
outdoor temp. sensor (TE)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
1. Check temp. sensor (TL).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, or short-circuit of  
outdoor temp. sensor (TL)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
1. Check suction temp. sensor (TS).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, or short-circuit of  
suction temp. sensor (TS)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
1. Check temp. sensor (TE, TS).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Miss-mounting of outdoor temp.  
sensor (TE, TS)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
1. Check outside temp. sensor (TO).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, or short-circuit of  
outside temp. sensor (TO)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
F08  
L29  
Continue  
Disconnection, or short-circuit of heat  
sink temp. sensor (TH)  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
error is detected  
F13  
F31  
L10  
L29  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
error is detected  
Outdoor P.C. EEPROM error  
Displayed when 1. Outdoor service P.C. board  
Incorrect setting of service P.C. board  
error is detected  
Check model type setting jumper wire.  
Communication error between MCUs  
on outdoor P.C. board  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
error is detected  
Heat sink overheat error  
1. Check screw tightening between PC. Board and heat  
sink and check radiator grease.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P07  
P15  
Stop  
Stop  
Heat sink temp. sensor detected  
over the specified temperature.  
2. Check heat sink cooling.  
1. Check gas leak.  
Detection of gas leak  
2. Check whether the service valve is fully opened.  
3. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
4. Check broken pipe.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Discharge temp. sensor (TD),  
Suction temp. sensor (TS) detected  
temperature over the specified temp.  
5. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD), suction temp.  
sensor (TS).  
4-way valve inverse error  
1. Check operation of 4-way valve.  
After heating operation has started,  
indoor heat exchanger temp. lowers  
under the specified temp.  
2. Check outdoor heat exchanger (TE), suction temp.  
sensor (TS).  
Displayed when  
P19  
H01  
Stop  
Stop  
error is detected 3. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC).  
4. Check 4-way valve coil.  
After heating operation has started,  
outdoor heat exchanger / suction  
temp. rises over the specified temp.  
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
Compressor break down  
1. Check power supply voltage. (AC198 to 264V)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Although operation has started,  
operation frequency decreases and  
operation stops.  
2. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle  
H01  
Compressor lock  
1. Trouble of compressor (Lock, etc.): Replace compressor.  
Displayed when  
H02  
H03  
H02  
H03  
* Over-current detection after  
compressor start-up  
Stop  
Stop  
2. Wiring error of compressor (Open circuit)  
error is detected  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
1. Check outdoor P.C. board. (AC current detection circuit)  
Current detection circuit error  
– 80 –  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Indoor unit  
Judgment and measures  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Condition  
before  
after  
3 series 4 series  
1. Check refrigerating cycle (Gas leak)  
2. Trouble of electronic expansion valve  
3. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).  
Discharge temp. error  
Discharge temp. (TD) detected  
temperature over the specified temp.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P03  
P04  
P03  
Stop  
1. Check case thermostat and connector.  
2. Check gas leak, recharge  
Case thermostat operation  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
H04  
P05  
Stop  
Stop  
3. Check whether the service valve is fully opened.  
4. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
5. Check broken pipe.  
Abnormal overheat of compressor  
Displayed when 1. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V  
error is detected  
Power supply voltage error  
1. Check outdoor heat exchanger sensor (TL).  
2. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC, TCJ).  
3. Check full open of service valve.  
High pressure protective operation  
• During cooling operation, outdoor  
temp. sensor (TL) detected  
temperature over specified temp.  
P20  
P22  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 4. Check indoor/outdoor fan.  
error is detected  
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
• During heating operation, indoor  
temp. sensor (TC, TCJ) detected  
temperature over specified temp.  
6. Check clogging and short circuit of indoor/outdoor heat  
exchanger.  
7. Overcharge of refrigerant. Recharge  
1. Check lock of fan motor.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P22  
Outdoor fan system error  
2. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V  
3. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
1. When performing operation while taking-off compressor  
wire, P26 error occurs. Check control P.C. board.  
Short-circuit error of compressor  
driving device  
Displayed when  
Stop  
Stop  
P26  
P29  
P26  
P29  
error is detected 2. When performing operation while taking-off compressor  
wire, an error does not occur. (Compressor rare short)  
Displayed when 1. Check control P.C. board.  
error is detected  
Position detection circuit error  
– 81 –  
10-2-4. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Indoor Unit)  
Check code  
[E01 error]  
NO  
Correct inter-unit cable  
of remote controller  
Is inter-unit cable of A and B normal?  
YES  
Is there no disconnection or  
contact error of connector on harness  
from terminal block of indoor unit?  
YES  
Correct connection of connector.  
Check circuit wiring.  
NO  
NO  
Is group control operation?  
YES  
NO  
Check power connection of indoor unit.  
(Turn on power again.)  
Is power of all indoor units turned on?  
YES  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Is power supplied to remote controller?  
AB terminal: Approx. DC18V  
Defect Replace  
YES  
YES  
Are 2 remote controllers set  
without master unit?  
Correct a master unit/a follower unit.  
(Remote controller address connector)  
NO  
Check remote controller P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[E09 error]  
YES  
Are 2 master units set in  
2 remote controllers?  
Correct as a master unit  
and a follower unit.  
NO  
Check remote controller P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 82 –  
[E04 error]  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is group address setup of  
remote controller correct?  
Does outdoor operate?  
Check Item code [14].  
YES  
YES  
Are wiring in indoor unit and  
1, 2, 3 inter-unit cables correct?  
Correct wiring and  
inter-unit cables.  
YES  
Correct wiring of connector  
and terminal blocks.  
Are wirings of terminal blocks  
(1, 2, 3) wired to CN04 normal?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Does D502 (Orange LED) flash  
after power supply turned on again?  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
Defect Replace  
[E10 error]  
YES  
Check power supply voltage.  
Correct lines.  
Check and eliminate noise, etc.  
Is there no disorder of power supply?  
NO  
Check indoor control P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 83 –  
[E18 error]  
NO  
Correct inter-unit cable  
of remote controller.  
Is inter-unit cable  
of A and B normal?  
YES  
Is there no disconnection  
or contact error of connector  
on harness from terminal block  
of indoor unit?  
YES  
Correct connection of connector.  
Check circuit wiring.  
NO  
NO  
Is group control operation?  
YES  
Check power  
connection status of indoor unit  
(Connect again).  
NO  
Is power of all indoor units turned on?  
YES  
NO  
Is Twin or Triple control?  
YES  
Is there no contact error  
of indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable  
(Signal line) of the main unit?  
YES  
Correct indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable  
(Serial signal line).  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
[E08, L03, L07, L08 error]  
E08: Duplicated indoor unit No.  
L03: There are 2 or more master units in a group control.  
L07: There is 1 or more group address [Individual] in a group control.  
L08: The indoor group address is unset. (13. ADDRESS SETUP)  
If the above error is detected when power supply turned on, the mode enters automatically in the automatic  
address set mode. (Check code is not output.)  
However, if the above error is detected during the automatic address set mode, a check code may be  
output.  
[L09 error]  
YES  
Set capacity data of indoor unit.  
(Setup item code (DN)=11)  
Is not yet capacity setting  
of indoor unit set up?  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 84 –  
[L20 error]  
Are wiring connections  
to communication lines  
U3 and U4 normal?  
NO  
Correct wiring connection.  
YES  
YES  
Is not the multiple same central  
control system addresses connected?  
Correct central control system address.  
NO  
Check central controller  
(including network adapter) and  
indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
[L30 error]  
NO  
NO  
Are outside devices of  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
connector CN80 connected?  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check outside devices.  
Defect Replace  
Do outside devices normally work?  
YES  
Check cause of operation.  
[P30 error] (Central controller)  
NO  
NO  
Is group operation carried out?  
YES  
Is there check code  
on sub remote controller in main  
and sub remote controllers?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Check corresponding  
indoor unit/outdoor unit.  
Defect Replace  
– 85 –  
[P10 error]  
Is connection of  
NO  
NO  
float switch connector  
(Indoor control board CN34)  
normal?  
Correct connection  
of connector.  
YES  
YES  
Does float switch work?  
YES  
Is circuit wiring normal?  
NO  
Check and correct wiring  
and wire circuit.  
NO  
Does drain pump work?  
YES  
Are connector pins 1 and 2  
at drain pump unit side shorted  
(Resistance value 0)?  
NO  
NO  
Is power of  
drain pump turned on? ∗  
YES  
YES  
Replace drain pump  
and indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Check the drain pipe, etc.  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Replace drain pump.  
Check wiring.  
Defect Replace  
Check that voltage of 1-2 pin of CN504 on the indoor P.C. board is +12V. (1 pin is plus (+).)  
[F10 error]  
NO  
Is connection of TA sensor connector  
(CN104 on indoor P.C. board) correct?  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
TA sensor resistance value normal?  
Replace TA sensor.  
YES  
Refer to Characteristics-1.  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 86 –  
[P12 error]  
Turn off the power.  
Is there no connection error or  
disconnection on connectors CN333  
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board  
(MCC-1570)?  
YES  
Correct connection  
of connector.  
CN333  
NO  
Remove connectors CN333  
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
CN334  
NO  
Does the fan rotate without trouble  
when handling the fan with hands?  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
YES  
Are resistance values  
between phases at fan motor connector  
CN333 motor side of indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570) correct? 1  
Incorrect  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
Correct  
1  
• Are not coil windings between (Red lead) and (White lead),  
between (White lead) and (Black lead),  
between (Black lead) and (Red lead) opened or shorted?  
The resistance should be the resistance value below.  
SM40, SM45, SM56, SM80 Approx. 70 to 100Ω  
SM110, SM140, SM160 Approx. 27 to 40Ω  
• Is not grounded between cabinet and , , . It should be 10Mor more.  
Is resistance value of  
fan motor connector CN334 motor side  
of indoor P.C. board  
Incorrect  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
(MCC-1570) correct? 2  
Correct  
2  
Resistance value confirmation of the fan motor position detection circuit  
Is not status between (Yellow lead) and (Pink lead) opened or shorted?  
The resistance should be approx. 5k to 20k.  
Is output of  
indoor fan motor position  
NO  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
detection signal correct? 3  
YES  
3  
Confirmation of the fan motor position detection signal  
• Using a voltage tester, measure voltage between CN334 and on the indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570) under condition that CN333 and CN334 are mounted and the power supply is turned on.  
When rotating the fan slowly with hands, the pin voltage should shake between 0 and 5V.  
• Between and : 5V  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 87 –  
[F02 error]  
NO  
NO  
Is connection of TC sensor connector  
Correct connection of connector.  
(CN101 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?  
YES  
Are characteristics of  
TC sensor resistance value normal?  
Replace TC sensor.  
YES  
Refer to Characteristics-2.  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
[F01 error]  
NO  
NO  
Is connection of TCJ sensor connector  
(CN102 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TCJ sensor.  
YES  
Are characteristics of  
TCJ sensor resistance value normal?  
YES  
Refer to TCJ sensor  
(Temperature-Resistance value characteristic table)  
Check indoor main P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 88 –  
[C06 error] (TCC-LINK central controller)  
NO  
NO  
Are U3 and U4 communication lines normal?  
YES  
Correct communication line.  
1  
Correct connection of connector.  
Is connection of connector normal?  
YES  
1  
TCC-LINK central:  
CN51 of TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440) and CN050 of indoor P.C. board  
NO  
Check connection of A and B terminal blocks.  
Correct communication line of remote controller.  
Are A and B communication lines normal?  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Is there no connection error of power supply cable?  
NO  
Correct power wiring.  
Is not the source power supply turned on?  
YES  
Turn on the source power supply.  
YES  
Did a power failure occur?  
NO  
YES  
YES  
Is the network address changed  
from the remote controller?  
Clear the check code.  
Eliminate noise, etc.  
NO  
Is there no noise source?  
NO  
Uncontrolled  
(Same to others)  
Can the other indoor units  
be normally controlled from the central controller?  
Or is the operation status of indoor unit reflected?  
Check central controller.  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Uncontrolled  
Can the indoor unit be normally controlled  
from the remote controller?  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check power supply transformer on  
TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440).  
Defect Replace  
– 89 –  
[E03 error] (Master indoor unit)  
[E03 error] is detected when the indoor unit cannot receive a signal from the remote controller  
(also central controller).  
Check A and B remote controllers and communication lines of the central control system U3 and U4.  
As communication is impossible, this check code [E03] is not displayed on the remote controller and the central  
controller. [E01] is displayed on the remote controller and [C06 error] is displayed on the central controller.  
If these check codes generate during operation, the air conditioner stops.  
[F29 error]  
This check code indicates a detection error of IC10 non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on the indoor unit P.C.  
board, which generated during operation of the air conditioner. Replace the service P.C. board.  
When EEPROM was not inserted when power supply turned on or when the EEPROM data read/write  
operation is impossible at all, the automatic address mode is repeated. In this time, [97 error] is displayed on  
the central controller.  
(Approx.  
3 minutes)  
(Approx.  
1 minute)  
LED (D02) on indoor unit  
P.C. board flashes with  
1Hz for approx. 10 seconds.  
[SET] is displayed  
on remote controller.  
[SET]  
goes off.  
Reboot  
(Reset)  
(Power ON)  
(Repetition)  
[P31 error] (Follower indoor unit)  
When the master unit of a group operation detected [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08] error, the follower unit of the  
group operation detects [P31 error] and then the unit stops.  
There is no display of the check code or alarm history of the remote controller. (In this model, the mode enters  
in automatic address set mode when the master unit detected [L03], [L07] or [L08] error.)  
– 90 –  
<In case of SP40 to 56>  
10-2-5. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)  
1) This section describes the diagnostic method for each check code displayed on the wired remote controller.  
2) When “APPLICATION CONTROL KIT” (TCB-PCOS1E2) sold separately is connected, the error contents  
can be judged by LED on the APPLICATION CONTROL KIT. In this case, turn off both bit 1 and 2 of DIP  
switch 01 on the All-purpose control kit.  
Check APPLICATION CONTROL KIT  
Check / Countermeasures  
(Part without special mention indicates a part of the outdoor unit.)  
code  
LED display  
[E04]  
[Indoor / Outdoor communication error]  
NO  
Is setting of group address  
on the remote controller correct?  
Check item code [14].  
YES  
NO  
Are inner wiring of the indoor unit  
and inter-unit wires (1, 2, 3) correct?  
Correct wiring  
and inter-unit wires.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Is wiring of the  
Correct wiring  
outdoor terminal block correct?  
of terminal block.  
YES  
Is connection of  
case thermo (CN500) correct?  
Correct connection  
of connector.  
YES  
Check and correct charged  
refrigerant amount.  
YES  
Does the case thermo operate?  
Is the compressor abnormally heated?  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F04]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
Is connection of CN601 correct?  
Is resistance value of TD sensor correct?  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
¡
¡
l l  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F06]  
There is a possibility that any of the following items is not correct.  
Checking LED on the APPLICATION CONTROL KIT enables you to judge what is incorrect.  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
¡
Is connection of CN600 correct?  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
l l l  
Is resistance value of TE sensor correct?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Suction temp. sensor (TS) error] Refer to column of [F12].  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
¡
l l  
l
LED display legend:  
Go off,  
Go on,  
Flash (5Hz)  
¡
¥
l
– 91 –  
<In case of SP40 to 56>  
Check APPLICATION CONTROL KIT  
Check / Countermeasures  
(Part without special mention indicates a part of the outdoor unit.)  
code  
LED display  
[F08]  
D01  
D02 D03  
D04  
[Outside temp. sensor (TO) error]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
¡
l
l l  
Is connection of CN602 correct?  
Is resistance value of TO sensor correct?  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F12]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Suction temp. sensor (TS) error]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
¡
l l  
l
Is connection of CN603 correct?  
Is resistance value of TS sensor correct?  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[H01]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Compressor breakdown]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
Is AC mains voltage correct?  
198 to 264V  
¥
¥
l
l
Correct power supply line.  
YES  
Is wiring connection correct?  
Compressor lead  
(P.C. board side, Compressor side)  
Reactor cord, Power supply lead  
NO  
Check and correct  
wiring connection.  
YES  
YES  
Remove and  
improve the cause of overload.  
Does abnormal overload happen?  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[H02]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Compressor lock]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
NO  
Is AC mains voltage correct?  
198 to 264V  
¥
l l  
l
Correct power supply line.  
YES  
Is wiring connection correct?  
Compressor lead  
(P.C. board side, Compressor side)  
Reactor cord, Power supply lead  
Check and  
correct connection of wires.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Is compressor  
under correct  
conditions?  
Compressor lock  
Is there stagnation  
of refrigerant?  
Replace  
YES  
NO  
TE, TS sensor,  
Check PMV.  
Defective Replace  
Does PMV operate correctly?  
YES  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
LED display legend:  
Go off,  
Go on,  
Flash (5Hz)  
¡
¥
l
– 92 –  
<In case of SP40 to 56>  
Check APPLICATION CONTROL KIT  
Check / Countermeasures  
(Part without special mention indicates a part of the outdoor unit.)  
code  
LED display  
[H03]  
D01  
D02 D03  
D04  
[Power supply error, Current detection circuit error]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
Are connections of wires correct?  
Between power cable and terminal block  
Between outdoor P.C. board and terminal block  
¥
¥
l l  
Correct wires  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[L29]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Power supply error, Current detection circuit error]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
¡
¡
l l  
or  
Correct  
power supply line.  
Is AC mains voltage correct?  
198 to 264V  
¥
¥
l
l
YES  
NO  
Compressor trouble  
Rare short check  
Defective Replace  
Is compressor under correct conditions?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[P03]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Discharge temp. error]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
YES  
NO  
¡
¡
l
l
Is there gas leak?  
Repair defective position.  
Recharge refrigerant.  
Is there refrigerant shortage?  
NO  
Repair defective position.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV under correct conditions?  
YES  
YES  
Remove and improve  
the cause of overload.  
Does an abnormal overload happen?  
NO  
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is connection of CN601 correct?  
Is resistance value of TD sensor correct?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[P04]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Power supply error (Voltage error)]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
¡
¡
l l  
Confirm power supply  
construction, etc.  
Is AC mains voltage correct?  
198 to 264V  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[P05]  
[Power supply error (Voltage error)]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
Refer to columns [H03] and [P04] and then check power supply and  
voltage error.  
¥
¥
l l  
or  
l l  
¡
¡
LED display legend:  
Go off,  
Go on,  
Flash (5Hz)  
¡
¥
l
– 93 –  
<In case of SP40 to 56>  
Check APPLICATION CONTROL KIT  
Check / Countermeasures  
(Part without special mention indicates a part of the outdoor unit.)  
code  
LED display  
[P19]  
[4-way reversal error]  
NO  
Does 4-way valve work correctly?  
(Check pipe temperature, etc.  
during cooling/heating operation.)  
YES  
Is coil of 4-way valve  
electrified during heating mode?  
NO  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
Check 4-way valve.  
Defect Replace  
NO  
Is flow of refrigerant by  
PMV under correct conditions?  
Check PMV.  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check temperature sensors.  
TE sensor CN600, TS sensor CN603  
Indoor TC sensor  
Defective Correct or replace  
In case of SP40 to 56, the coil of 4-way valve is electrified during cooling cycling.  
In cooling operation, [P19] error may be displayed when the refrigerant pressure rises high abnormally.  
In this case, remove the cause of pressure rising and then diagnose it again.  
[P22]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Outdoor fan system error]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
Is connection of connector  
CN300 correct?  
¡
¡
¡
Correct connection of connector.  
l
YES  
After pulling out the connector  
of the fan motor CN300, rotate its shaft by hands.  
Can it rotate smoothly?  
Is the fan motor coil resistance within the range described below?  
Between red and white lead : 18 to 30Ω  
Between white and black lead : 18 to 30Ω  
Between black and red lead : 18 to 30Ω  
NO  
Fan motor  
exchange  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defective Replace  
[P26]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Short-circuit of compressor driving device]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
NO  
Is AC mains voltage correct?  
198 to 264V  
Correct power line.  
¥
l l l  
YES  
Is there any problem on connection  
of compressor lead or reactor?  
(Check connection referring to the wiring diagram.)  
YES  
Correct wiring.  
NO  
NO  
Replace  
outdoor P.C. board.  
After disconnection of the compressor leads from  
P.C. board, the air conditioner operates in heating mode.  
Does the fan motor run?  
YES  
Check compressor. (Rare short, etc.)  
Defective Replace  
[P29]  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
[Position detection circuit error]  
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defective Replace  
¥
l
l l  
LED display legend:  
Go off,  
Go on,  
Flash (5Hz)  
¡
¥
l
– 94 –  
<In case of SP80>  
10-2-6. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)  
1) This section describes the diagnostic method for each check code displayed on the wired remote controller.  
2) In some cases, a check code indicates multiple symptoms.  
In this case, confirm LED display on the outdoor P.C. board to narrow the contents to be confirmed.  
3) The check code on the remote controller is displayed only when the same error occurred continuously by  
multiple times while LED of the outdoor P.C. board displays even an error which occurred once.  
Therefore the display on the remote controller may differ from that of LED.  
How to check LED display on outdoor P.C. board  
Dip switch setup  
<Latest error display>  
Only 1) of SW803 is ON.  
• When turning on 1) only of SW803, the latest error  
is displayed. As the memory is stored, it can be  
confirmed even if the power supply is turned off  
once. (excluding outside temp. sensor (TO) error)  
• When the work finished or the outdoor temp.  
sensor (TO) error was found, turn off all of SW803.  
(The error which occurs at present is displayed.)  
<Error display, which occurs at present>  
All SW803 are OFF. (Initial status)  
Display selection  
<Display 1> ó<Display 2>  
(No error) (Error occurred)  
(Push SW800)  
• When an error happens, some of yellow LED  
(D800 to D804) turn on. <Display 1>  
D800 (Yellow)  
D801 (Yellow)  
D802 (Yellow)  
D803 (Yellow)  
D804 (Yellow)  
D805 (Green)  
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
¡
l
• If pushing the button switch SW800 for 1 second  
under the above condition, the yellow LED is  
displayed with flashing. <Display 2>  
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
¡
• When pushing SW800 for 1 second again, the  
status returns to <Display 1>.  
(Example of discharge temp. sensor error)  
: Go off, : Go on, : Flash  
• The error contents can be confirmed by combining  
<Display 1> and <Display 2>.  
¡
¥
l
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[E04]  
[Indoor/Outdoor communication error]  
NO  
Is setting of group address  
of remote controller correct?  
Check Item code [14].  
YES  
NO  
Are inner wiring of indoor unit and  
inter-unit wires (1, 2, 3) correct?  
Correct wiring  
and inter-unit cable.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Are CN04 connection and wiring  
of terminal blocks (1, 2, 3) correct?  
Correct wiring of connectors  
and terminal blocks.  
YES  
After turning off the power supply,  
turn on it again.  
Does D502 (Orange LED) flash?  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 95 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[F04]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is connection of CN603 correct?  
Is resistance value of TD sensor correct?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F06]  
• There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.  
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error, Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error,  
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error, Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS)  
<Display 1> <Display 2> Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is connection of CN601 correct?  
Is resistance value of TE sensor correct?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error] Refer to [F07] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error] Refer to [F12] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)] Refer to [F15] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
[F07]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is connection of CN604 correct?  
Is resistance value of TL sensor correct?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 96 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[F08]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Outside temp. sensor (TO) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is connection of CN602 correct?  
Is resistance value of TO sensor correct?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F12]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is connection of CN600 correct?  
Is resistance value of TS sensor correct?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F13]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
l
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replac  
[F15]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is mounting status of  
TE and TS sensors correct?  
Correct sensor mounting.  
YES  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is connection of CN600 correct?  
Is resistance value of TS sensor correct?  
YES  
Is connection of CN601 correct?  
Correct connector.  
Is resistance value of TE sensor correct?  
Sensor error Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F31]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 97 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[H01]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor break down]  
¥
l
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
NO  
Is AC mains voltage correct?  
AC198 to 264V  
Correct power supply line.  
YES  
Is wire connection correct?  
Compressor lead  
(Board side, Compressor side),  
Reactor lead, Power supply lead  
NO  
Check wire connection  
and correct it.  
YES  
YES  
Remove and improve  
the cause of overload.  
Does an abnormal overload happen?  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[H02]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor lock]  
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
l
¡
NO  
NO  
Is AC mains voltage correct?  
AC198 to 264V  
Correct power supply line.  
YES  
Is wire connection correct?  
Compressor lead  
(Board side, Compressor side),  
Reactor lead, Power supply lead  
Check wire connection  
and correct it.  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Is compressor under correct conditions?  
NO  
Defect Replace  
Is there refrigerant stagnation?  
YES  
Compressor lock Replace  
NO  
Check TE, TS sensors and PMV.  
Does PMV correctly operate?  
YES  
Defect Replace  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[H03]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Current detection circuit error]  
¥
¥
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 98 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[H04]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation]  
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
NO  
NO  
Are CN609 connection and  
case thermostat correct?  
Correct connector.  
Case thermostat error Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Short each pins of CN609.  
Can compressor operate?  
Defect Replace  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Repair defectives position.  
Recharge refrigerant.  
Is there gas leak?  
Is there refrigerant shortage?  
NO  
Is service valve fully opened?  
YES  
Open service valve fully.  
NO  
Correct defective position.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV under correct conditions?  
YES  
Check crushed or broken pipe.  
Defect Correct and Replace  
[L10]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type]: Only when service P.C. board is used  
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
¡
Cut jumper line according  
to the explanation sheet packaged  
with the service P.C. board.  
– 99 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[L29]  
There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.  
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.  
Communication error between MCU, Heat sing temp. sensor (TH) error,  
EEPROM error, Unset model type, Heat sink overheat error, Gas leak detection,  
4-way valve inverse error  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Communication error between MCUs]  
¥
l
¥
¥
¥
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error] Refer to [F13] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error] Refer to [F31] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type] Refer to [L10] column.  
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error] Refer to [P07] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection] Refer to [P15] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve inverse error] Refer to [P19] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
¥
¡
– 100 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P03]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
l
¡
YES  
NO  
Repair defective position.  
Recharge refrigerant.  
Is there gas leak?  
Is there refrigerant shortage?  
NO  
Repair defective position.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV under correct conditions?  
YES  
YES  
Remove and improve  
the cause of overload.  
Does an abnormal overload happen?  
NO  
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is connection of CN603 correct?  
Is resistance value of TD sensor correct?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[P04]  
There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.  
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.  
Power supply error (Vdc), High pressure protective operation, Case thermostat  
operation  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation] Refer to [H04] column.  
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error] Refer to [P05] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation] Refer to [P20] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
¡
[P05]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
¡
NO  
Is AC mains voltage correct?  
198 to 264V  
Confirm power supply  
construction, etc.  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 101 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P07]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
Are the power devices on  
P.C. board screwed without looseness?  
(Rear sides of Q201, Q300, Q650, DB01, DB02)  
Are radiation grease properly applied?  
(Q201, Q650, DB01, DB02)  
NO  
YES  
Apply radiation grease to objective parts.  
Retightening of screws.  
(Be sure not to forget to attach insulating sheet  
between heat sink and Q300.)  
Does something block the  
ventilation around the heat sink?  
Does something block air flow  
from the fan?  
YES  
Remove blocking matter.  
Correct short-circuit.  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[P15]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
YES  
Is there gas leak?  
Is there refrigerant shortage?  
Repair defective part.  
Recharge refrigerant.  
NO  
NO  
Correct defective part.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV under correct conditions?  
YES  
NO  
Open service valve fully.  
Is service valve fully opened?  
YES  
YES  
Correct and replace piping.  
Is there crushed pipe?  
NO  
Check temp. sensor.  
TD sensor CN603  
TS sensor CN600  
Error  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
OK  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 102 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P19]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve reversal error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
¥
¡
Temperature sensor check  
TE sensor CN601  
TS sensor CN600  
Indoor TC sensor  
Defect Correct and repair  
Does 4-way valve  
work correctly?  
(Check pipe temp. etc.  
in cooling/heating operation.)  
YES  
NO  
Is the coil resistance value  
of 4-way valve between  
1.3kand 1.6 k?  
NO  
Replace coil of 4-way valve.  
YES  
Check operation of  
outdoor P.C. board.  
(See below.)  
Error  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect replace  
OK  
Check 4-way valve.  
Defect Replace  
Check method of outdoor P.C. board operation (Self-holding valve type)  
1) Set SW804 of Dip switch as the following figure and then push SW801 for  
approx. 1 second to check exchange operation to cooling cycle/heating cycle.  
• Power is turned on for approx. 10 seconds.  
• In case of operating with the coil of 4-way valve connected to CN701, take  
interval over 1 minute before re-operation; otherwise it may cause overheat  
of the coil.  
2) After check, turn off all the Dip switch SW804.  
Exchange to cooling cycle  
Exchange to heating cycle  
SW804 SW801 CN701  
1
SW804 SW801 CN701  
1
Push  
4
Push  
4
DC200V or more  
DC200V or more  
Note) Check by tester  
Analog tester : Good if over DC200V  
Digital tester : Good if the maximum voltage is over DC200V though  
the varied voltage may be displayed.  
In cooling operation, [P19] error may happen when the refrigerant pressure rose  
abnormally. In this case, remove the cause of pressure rising and then diagnose  
the error again.  
– 103 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P20]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
¡
NO  
Is service valve  
fully opened?  
Open service valve fully.  
YES  
Reset the power supply  
and then perform test run  
matching to the season.  
Cooling season  
Cooling operation  
Heating season  
Heating operation  
NO  
Is resistance value  
of TL sensor correct?  
YES  
Replace TL sensor.  
YES  
Is there any defect such as  
loosening of nut in the outdoor fan?  
NO  
Check outdoor fan.  
Defect Replace, retightening  
YES  
Does the outdoor fan perform  
abnormal operation?  
NO  
Check the same items as  
[P22] error.  
Is there anything  
which interfere heat exchange  
of outdoor unit?  
YES  
• Clogging of heat exchanger  
• Short-circuit  
NO  
Eliminate interfering element.  
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,  
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.  
Defect Correct defect.  
NO  
NO  
Does indoor fan  
operate correctly?  
Are indoor fan motor  
an connector correct?  
YES  
YES  
Repair defect.  
NO  
Are resistance values  
of indoor TC and TCJ  
sensors normal?  
Replace  
sensor.  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
Is there anything which interfere  
heat exchange of indoor unit?  
• Choking up the filter  
• Clogging of heat exchanger  
• Short-circuit  
YES  
Eliminate interfering element.  
NO  
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,  
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.  
Defect Correct defect.  
– 104 –  
<In case of SP80>  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P22]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Fan system error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
¥
¡
NO  
Is AC mains voltage correct?  
(198 to 264V)  
Check wiring construction.  
Ask repair of power supply.  
YES  
Rotate shaft of the fan motor by hands  
during power-OFF. Can it rotate smoothly?  
Is coil resistance of fan motor correct?  
YES  
Between red and white lead wire : 12 to 20Ω  
Between white and black lead wire : 12 to 20Ω  
Between black and red lead wire : 12 to 20Ω  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Replace fan motor.  
Defect Replace  
Single operation check for outdoor fan  
1) Set Dip switch of SW804 as the following figure and then push SW801 for  
approx. 1 second to check single operation of outdoor fan.  
Use this method to check which fan, upper or lower fan, has a trouble.  
• When SW801 is pushed for 1 second  
again or 2 minutes passed, the fan stops.  
Outdoor fan single operation  
2) After check, turn off all Dip switch of  
SW804.  
SW804  
SW801  
Push  
[P26]  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Short-circuit of compressor drive element]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
¥
¡
Are connections of  
NO  
compressor lead and reactor correct?  
(Check referring to the Wiring diagram.)  
Correct wiring.  
YES  
YES  
Does the same error occur in  
operation without compressor lead?  
Replace outdoor P.C. board.  
NO  
Check compressor. (Rear short, etc.)  
Defect Replace  
[P29]  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Position detection circuit error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
¥
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
No code  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Other error] Compressor disorder due to sudden change of load, etc.  
Although the display of outdoor LED outputs, the unit automatically restarts  
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
and error is not determined.  
LED display also may output due to wire coming-off of compressor.  
– 105 –  
10-2-7. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)  
Temperature sensor Temperature – Resistance value characteristic table  
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors TD,TL sensors  
Representative value  
Representative value  
Resistance value (k)  
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)  
Resistance value (k)  
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)  
Temperature  
Temperature  
(°C)  
(°C)  
0
10  
20  
25  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
32.33  
19.63  
12.23  
9.75  
33.80  
20.35  
12.59  
10.00  
7.990  
5.192  
3.451  
2.343  
1.623  
1.146  
0.8237  
0.6023  
35.30  
21.09  
12.95  
10.25  
8.218  
5.375  
3.594  
2.454  
1.709  
1.213  
0.8761  
0.6434  
0
10  
20  
25  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
150.5  
92.76  
58.61  
47.01  
37.93  
25.12  
17.00  
11.74  
8.269  
5.925  
4.321  
3.205  
161.3  
99.05  
62.36  
49.93  
40.22  
26.55  
17.92  
12.34  
8.668  
6.195  
4.507  
3.336  
172.7  
105.6  
66.26  
52.97  
42.59  
28.03  
18.86  
12.95  
9.074  
6.470  
4.696  
3.468  
7.764  
5.013  
3.312  
2.236  
1.540  
1.082  
0.7740  
0.5634  
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100  
Temperature (˚C)  
TD,TL sensors  
200  
150  
100  
50  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
0
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100  
Temperature (˚C)  
As TH sensor (Outdoor unit heat sink temp. sensor) is incorporated in the outdoor control P.C. board, the  
resistance value cannot be measured.  
– 106 –  
11. REPLACEMENT OF SERVICE P.C. BOARD  
11-1. Indoort Unit (Slim DuctType)  
<Note: when replacing the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing>  
The nonvolatile memory (hereafter called EEPROM, IC503) on the indoor unit P.C. board before replacement  
includes the model specific type information and capacity codes as the factory-set value and the important  
setting data which have been automatically or manually set when the indoor unit is installed, such as system/  
indoor/group addresses, high ceiling select setting, etc.  
When replacing the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing, follow the procedures below.  
After replacement completes, confirm whether the settings are correct by checking the indoor unit No., Group  
header unit/follower unit settings and perform the cooling cycle confirmation through the trial operation.  
<Replacement procedures>  
CASE 1  
Before replacement, the indoor unit can be turned on and the setting data can be read out by  
wired remote control operation.  
EEPROM data read out [1]  
ò
Replacement of P.C. board for Indoor unit servicing and power on [2]  
ò
Writing the read out EEPROM data [3]  
ò
Power reset  
(for all indoor units connected to the remote control when the group operation control is performed.)  
CASE 2  
The EEPROM before replacement is defective and the setting data cannot be read out.  
EEPROM data read out [2]  
ò
Writing the setting data to EEPROM, such as high ceiling installation setting and  
optional connection setting, etc., based on the customer information. [3]  
ò
Power reset  
(for all indoor units connected to the remote control when the group operation control is performed.)  
– 107 –  
[1] Setting data read out from EEPROM  
The setting data modified on the site, other than factory-set value, stored in the EEPROM shall be read out.  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
Step 1 Push  
,
and  
button on the remote controller simultaneously for more than 4 seconds.  
When the group operation control is performed, the unit No. displayed for the first time is the header unit No.  
At this time, the CODE No. (DN) shows “10 ”. Also, the fan of the indoor unit selected starts its operation  
and the swing operation also starts if it has the louvers.  
UNIT LOUVER  
Step 2 Every time when the  
button is pushed, the indoor unit No. under the group control is displayed in  
order. Specify the indoor unit No. to be replaced.  
1. Change the CODE No. (DN) to 10 01 by pushing  
/
buttons for the temperature  
setting. (this is the setting for the filter sign lighting time.)  
At this time, be sure to write down the setting data displayed.  
2. Change the CODE No. (DN) by pushing  
/
buttons for the temperature setting.  
Similarly, be sure to write down the setting data displayed.  
3. Repeat the step 2-2 to set the other settings in the same way and write down the setting data as shown  
in the table 1 (example).  
The CODE No. (DN) are ranged from “01 ” to “FF ”. The CODE No. (DN) may skip.  
TEST  
Step 3 After writing down all setting data, push  
button to return to the normal stop status.  
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote controller operation is available again.)  
CODE No. required at least  
1. The CODE No. for the Indoor unit type and Indoor unit capacity are  
required to set the rotation number setting of the fan.  
DN  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Contents  
Type  
2. If the system/indoor/group addresses are different from those before  
replacement, the auto-address setting mode starts and the manual  
resetting may be required again.  
Indoor unit capacity  
System address  
Indoor unit address  
Group address  
(when the multiple units group operation including twin system.)  
[2] P.C. Board for indoor unit servicing replacement procedures  
Step 1 Replace the P.C. board to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.  
At this time, perform the same setting of the jumper wire (J01) setting (cut), switch SW501, (short-circuit)  
connector CN34 as the setting of the P.C. board before replacement.  
Step 2 According to the system configuration, turn on the indoor unit following to the either methods shown below.  
a) Single operation (Indoor unit is used as standalone.)  
Turn on the indoor unit.  
1. After completion of the auto-address setting mode (required time: approx. 5 min.), proceed to [3].  
(System address = 1, Indoor unit address = 1, Group address = 0 (standalone) are automatically set.)  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
2. Push  
,
and  
buttons simultaneously for more than 4 seconds to interrupt the auto-address  
setting mode, and proceed to [3]. (The unit No. “  
” is displayed.)  
b) Group operation (including twin system)  
Turn on the indoor unit(s) with its P.C. board replaced to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing, accord-  
ing to either methods 1 or 2 shown below.  
1. Turn on only the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced. (Be sure to confirm the remote controller is  
surely connected. If not, the operation [3] cannot be performed.)  
Perform either methods 1 or 2 described in item a) above.  
2. Turn on the multiple indoor units including the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced.  
Twin 1 system only  
• All group connections  
After completion of the auto-address setting mode (required time: approx. 5 min.), proceed to [3].  
The header unit of the group may be changed by performing the auto-address setting.  
Also, the system address/Indoor unit address of the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced may be  
assigned to the addresses (not used) other than those of the indoor units without its P.C. board replaced.  
It is recommended to keep the information in advance, which cooling system the indoor unit belongs to  
or whether the indoor unit works as the header unit or the follower unit in the group control operation.  
– 108 –  
[3] Writing the setting data to EEPROM  
The settings stored in the EEPROM of the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing are the factory-set values.  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
Step 1 Push  
,
and  
buttons on the remote controller simultaneously for more than 4 seconds.1  
In the group control operation, the unit No. displayed for the first time is the header unit No.  
At this time, the CODE No. (DN) shows “10 ”. Also, the fan of the indoor unit selected starts its operation  
and the swing operation starts if it has the louvers.  
(The unit No. “  
” is displayed if the auto-address setting mode is interrupted in [2] step 2 a))  
UNIT LOUVER  
Step 2 Every time when  
button is pushed, the indoor unit No. in the group control operation are displayed  
in order. 2  
(The settings stored in the EEPROM of the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing are the factory-set values.)  
Specify the indoor unit No. with its P.C. board replaced to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.  
(You cannot perform this operation if “  
” is displayed.)  
Step 3 Select the CODE No. (DN) can be selected by pushing the  
/
button for the temperature setting. 3  
• Set the indoor unit type and capacity.  
The factory-set values shall be written to the EEPROM by changing the type and capacity.  
1. Set the CODE No. (DN) to “10 ”. (without change)  
2. Select the type by pushing  
/
buttons for the timer setting. 4  
(For example, 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type is set to “0001”. Refer to table 2)  
SET  
3. Push  
button. 5 (The operation completes if the setting data is displayed.)  
buttons for the temperature setting.  
buttons for the timer setting.  
4. Change the CODE No. (DN) to “11 ” by pushing  
5. Select the capacity by pushing  
/
/
(For example, 80 Type is set to “0012”. Refer to table 3)  
SET  
6. Push  
button. 6 (The setting completes if the setting data are displayed.)  
7. As P.C. board of the Slim Duct type differs from that of the 4-way Discharge Cassette type, selection by  
HP is unnecessary.  
TEST  
8. Push the  
button to return to the normal stop status.  
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote controller operation is available again.)  
If the plug for short-circuit is attached on the P.C. board  
before replacement, attach it on the P.C. board replaced.  
Connector (CN504)  
for drain pump  
CN34  
SW501  
(Red)  
J02  
Type  
Jumper wire (J02)  
J01  
Slim Duct  
SM40 to 56  
None  
<Fig. 1 RBC-AMT32E>  
3
5
4
2
1
6
– 109 –  
Step 4 Write the on-site setting data to the EEPROM, such as address setting, etc. Perform the steps 1 and 2  
above again.  
Step 5 Change the CODE No. (DN) to “01 ” by pushing  
/
buttons for the temperature setting.  
(this is the setting for the filter sign lighting time.)  
Step 6 Check the setting data displayed at this time with the setting data put down in [1].  
1. If the setting data is different, modify the setting data by pushing  
/
buttons for the timer setting to  
the data put down in [1].  
The operation completes if the setting data is displayed.  
2. If the data is the same, proceed to next step.  
Step 7 Change the CODE No. (DN) by pushing  
As described above, check the setting data and modify to the data put down in [1].  
Step 8 Repeat the steps 6 and 7.  
Step 9 After the setting completes, push  
/
buttons for the temperature setting.  
TEST  
button to return to the normal stop status.  
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote control operation is available again.)  
The CODE No. (DN) are ranged from “01 ” to “FF ”. The CODE No. (DN) is not limited to be serial No.  
SET  
Even after modifying the data wrongly and pushing  
button, it is possible to return to the data before  
CL  
modification by pushing  
button if the CODE No. (DN) is not changed.  
<Fig. 2 EEPROM layout diagram>  
The EEPROM (IC503) is attached to the IC socket. When detaching the EEPROM, use a tweezers, etc.  
Be sure to attach the EEPROM by fitting its direction as shown in the figure.  
Do not bend the IC lead when replacing.  
Cut out  
EEPROM  
EEPROM  
IC503  
Cut out  
IC socket  
– 110 –  
Table 1. Setting data (CODE No. table (example))  
Setting data  
DN  
01  
02  
03  
Item  
Filter sign lighting time  
Factory-set value  
Depending on Type  
Filter pollution leve  
0000: standard  
Central control address  
0099: Not determined  
0002: +2°C  
(flooring installation type: 0)  
06  
Heating suction temperature shift  
OF  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Cooling only  
0000: Heat pump  
Type  
Depending on model type  
Depending on capacity type  
0099: Not determined  
0099: Not determined  
0099: Not determined  
Indoor unit capacity  
System address  
Indoor unit address  
Group address  
Temperature range of cooling/heating  
automatic SW control point  
1E  
0003: 3 deg (Ts ± 1.5)  
28  
2A  
2b  
31  
32  
40  
Power failure automatic recovery  
Option/Abnormal input (CN70) SW  
0000: None  
0002: Humidifier  
Thermo output SW (T10  
)
0000: Thermo ON  
0000: Not available  
0000: Body sensor  
0003: Humidifier ON + Pump OFF  
ƒ
Ventilation fan (standalone)  
Sensor SW (Selection of static pressure)  
Humidifier control (+ drain pump control)  
0000: Standard (10Pa)  
0001: High static pressure 1 (20Pa)  
0003: High static pressure 2 (35Pa)  
0006: High static pressure 3 (50Pa)  
5d  
External static pressure  
60  
Timer setting (wired remote controller)  
0000: Available  
0075: 75 %  
Demand setting  
(outdoor unit current demand)  
C2  
d0  
d1  
Remote controller operation save function  
Frost protection function  
0001: Enable  
0000: None  
Table 2. Type: CODE No. 10  
Table 3. Indoor unit capacity: CODE No. 11  
Setting data  
Type  
Type name abb.  
Setting data  
0000*  
0006  
Type  
Disable  
40  
0005  
Slim Duct Type  
RAV-SM∗∗∗SDT-E  
0007  
45  
0009  
56  
0012  
80  
0015  
110  
140  
160  
0017  
0018  
EEPROM initial value on the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.  
– 111 –  
12. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS  
12-1. Indoor Unit (Slim DuctType)  
12-1-1. Test Run Setup on Remote Controller  
<Wired remote controller>  
TEST  
1. When pushing  
button on the remote controller for 4 seconds or more, “TEST” is displayed on LC display.  
ON / OFF  
Then push  
button.  
• “TEST” is displayed on LC display during operation of Test Run.  
• During Test Run, temperature cannot be adjusted but air volume can be selected.  
• In heating and cooling operation, a command to fix the Test Run frequency is output.  
• Detection of error is performed as usual. However, do not use this function except case of Test Run  
because it applies load on the unit.  
2. Use either heating or cooling operation mode for [TEST].  
NOTE : The outdoor unit does not operate after power has been turned on or for approx. 3 minutes after  
operation has stopped.  
TEST  
3. After a Test Run has finished, push  
button again and check that [TEST] on LC display has gone off.  
(To prevent a continuous test run operation, 60-minutes timer release function is provided to this remote  
controller.)  
12-1-2. Forced Defrost Setup of Remote Controller (For wired remote controller only)  
(Preparation in advance)  
TEST  
SET  
CL  
1
Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.  
(Push buttons while the air conditioner stops.)  
The first displayed unit No. is the master indoor unit address in the group control.  
UNIT  
2
Every pushing  
other.  
button, the indoor unit No. in the group control is displayed one after the  
Select a main indoor unit (outdoor unit is connected) which is to be defrosted. In this time, fan and louver of  
the selected indoor unit operate.  
TEMP.  
3
4
5
6
Using the set temperature  
buttons, specify the item code (DN) 8C.  
TIME  
Using the timer time  
buttons, set time to data 0001. (0000 at shipment)  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK if indication lights)  
TEST  
Pushing  
button returns the status to the normal stop status.  
(Practical operation)  
ON / OFF  
• Push ON/OFF  
Key.  
• Select the HEAT mode.  
• After while, the forced defrost signal is sent to the outdoor unit and then the outdoor unit starts defrost operation.  
(The forced defrost operation is performed for Max. 12 minutes.)  
• After defrost operation finished, the operation returns to the heating operation.  
To execute the defrost operation again, start procedure from above item 1 .  
(If the forced defrost operation was executed once, setting of the above forced defrost operation is cleared.)  
– 112 –  
12-1-3. LED Display on P.C. Board  
1. D501 (Red)  
• It goes on (Goes on by operation of the main microcomputer) at the same time when the power supply is  
turned on.  
• It flashes with 1-second interval (every 0.5 second):When there is no EEPROM or writing-in operation fails.  
• It flashes with 10-seconds interval (every 5 second): During DISP mode  
• It flashes with 2-seconds interval (every 1 second): While setting of function select (EEPROM)  
2. D403 (Red)  
• It goes on when power supply of the remote controller is turned on. (Lights on hardware)  
3. D503 (Yellow): Main bus communication  
• It goes on for 5 seconds in the first half of communication with the central controller.  
4. D504 (Green): Sub bus communication  
• It flashes for 5 seconds in the first half of communication with the remote controller. (Group master unit)  
• It flashes with 0.2-second interval (for 0.1 second) for 5 second in the latter half of communication between  
master and follower in the Gr indoor unit.  
5. D14 (Orange)  
• It flashes while receiving the serial signal from the outdoor unit. (Hardware)  
6. D15 (Green)  
• It flashes while sending the serial signal to the outdoor unit. (Hardware)  
12-1-4. Function Selection Setup  
<Procedure> Perform setting while the air conditioner stops.  
TEST  
SET  
CL  
1
Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.  
The first displayed unit No. is the master indoor unit address in the group control.  
In this time, fan and louver of the selected indoor unit operate.  
ò
button (button at left side), the indoor unit No. in the group control is  
displayed one after the other. In this time, fan and louver of the selected indoor unit only operate.  
UNIT LOUVER  
2
Every pushing  
ò
TEMP.  
3
4
5
Using the set temperature  
buttons, specify the item code (DN).  
ò
TIME  
Using the timer time  
buttons, select the set data.  
ò
button. (OK if indication lights)  
SET  
Push  
To change the selected indoor unit, proceed to Procedure  
2
.
To change item to be set up, proceed to Procedure  
3
.
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
ò
button returns the status  
to the normal stop status.  
TEST  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
6
Pushing  
3
6
4
5
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
1
2
<Operation procedure>  
1 2 3 4 5 6 END  
– 113 –  
Function selection item No. (DN) list  
DN  
Item  
Contents  
At shipment from factory  
0000: None  
0001: 150H  
01 Filter sign lighting time  
0002: 2500H  
0004: 10000H  
0003: 5000H  
0005: Clogging sensor used  
According to type  
0000: Standard  
0001: Heavy stain (Half of standard time)  
02 Filter stain level  
0000: Standard  
0001: No.1 unit  
0099: Undecided  
to  
0064: No.64 unit  
03 Central control address  
0099: Undecided  
0000: No shift  
0002: +2°C  
0001: +1°C  
0010: +10°C  
(Up to +6 is recommended.)  
0002: +2°C  
(Floor type 0000: 0°C)  
06 Heating suction temp. shift  
to  
0000: Heat pump  
0001: Cooling only (No display for [AUTO] [HEAT] )  
0F Cooling-only  
10 Type  
0000: Heat pump  
0000: (1-way air discharge cassette)  
0001: (4-way air discharge cassette) to 0037  
According to model type  
11 Indoor unit capacity  
12 Line address  
0000: Undecided  
0001: No.1 unit  
0001: No.1 unit  
0000: Individual  
0001 to 0034  
According to capacity type  
0099: Undecided  
to  
to  
0030: No.30 unit  
13 Indoor unit address  
0064: No.64 unit  
0099: Undecided  
0001: Master unit in group  
14 Group address  
0099: Undecided  
0002: Follower unit in group  
In automatic cooling/heating, temp. 0000: 0 deg  
to  
0010: 10 deg  
1E width of cool heat, heat →  
(Cool/heat are reversed with ± (Data value) /  
2 against the set temperature)  
0003: 3 deg (Ts±1.5)  
0000: None  
cool mode selection control point  
28 Automatic reset of power failure  
0000: None  
0000: Filter input  
0001: Provided  
Selection of option / error input  
(CN70)  
2A  
0001: Alarm input (Air cleaner, etc.)  
0002: Humidifier input  
0002: Humidifier  
Selection of thermostat output  
(T10 ƒ )  
0000: Indoor thermostat ON  
0001: ON receiving output of outdoor compressor  
2b  
0000: Thermostat ON  
0000: Normal (JEMA)  
2E Selection of HA (T10) terminal  
0001: Card input (Forgotten to be off)  
0002: Fire alarm input  
0000: Normal (HA terminal)  
31 Fan (Single operation)  
32 Sensor selection  
0000: Impossible  
0001: Possible  
0000: Impossible  
0000: Body TA sensor  
0001: Remote controller sensor  
0000: Body sensor  
0000: No control  
Humidifier control  
40 (+Drain pump control)  
(This function is not provided.)  
0001: Humidifier + Vaporizing type (Pump ON)  
0002: Humidifier + Supersonic type  
(Pump ON when specified time elapsed)  
0003: Humidifier + Natural drain type (Pump OFF)  
0003: Humidifier ON  
Pump OFF  
0000: Standard (At shipment)  
0001: High static pressure 1  
0003: High static pressure 2  
0006: High static pressure 3  
(10 Pa)  
(20 Pa)  
(35 Pa)  
(50 Pa)  
5d External static pressure  
0000: Standard  
Timer setting  
60  
0000: Operable  
0001: Operation prohibited  
0000: Operable  
0075: 75%  
(Wired remote controller)  
C2 Current demand X% to outdoor unit 0050: 50%  
to  
0100: 100%  
Existence of remote controller save 0000: Invalid (Impossible)  
function 0001: Valid (Possible)  
D0  
D1  
0001: Valid (Possible)  
Existence of 8°C heating operation 0000: Invalid (Impossible)  
function 0001: Valid (Possible)  
0001: Invalid (Impossible)  
– 114 –  
12-1-5. Wiring and Setting of Remote Controller Control  
2-remote controller control  
<Wired remote controller>  
(Controlled by 2 remote controllers)  
How to set wired remote controller  
as sub remote controller  
This control is to operate 1 or multiple indoor units  
are operated by 2 remote controllers.  
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)  
Change DIP switch inside of the rear side of the  
remote controller switch from remote controller master  
to sub. (In case of RBC-AMT32E)  
• When connected 2 remote controllers  
operate an indoor unit  
Remote controller (Inside of the rear side)  
Remote controller  
switch (Master)  
Remote controller  
switch (Sub)  
Sold  
separately  
Sold  
separately  
1 2  
Sub remote  
controller  
A B  
A B  
Master remote  
controller  
1
2
Remote controller  
cables (Procured locally)  
DIP switch  
Terminal block for  
remote controller cables  
1
2
A B  
Indoor unit  
1 2 3  
<Wireless remote controller>  
1 2 3  
How to set wireless remote controller to sub  
remote controller  
Outdoor unit  
Change OFF of Bit [3: Remote controller Sub/Master]  
of switch S003 to ON.  
• When connected 2 remote controllers  
operate the twin  
[Operation]  
Remote controller  
switch (Master)  
Remote controller  
1. The operation contents can be changed by Last-  
push-priority.  
switch (Sub)  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wire  
(Procured locally)  
Sold  
separately  
Sold  
separately  
2. Use a timer on either Master remote controller or  
Sub remote controller.  
A B  
A B  
Terminal block for  
remote controller cables  
A B  
A B  
Indoor unit 1  
1 2 3  
Indoor unit 2  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
Inter-unit wiring  
between indoor units  
(Procured locally)  
Outdoor unit  
(Setup method)  
One or multiple indoor units are controlled by  
2 remote controllers.  
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)  
– 115 –  
12-1-6. Monitor Function of Remote Controller Switch  
n Calling of sensor temperature display  
<Contents>  
Each data of the remote controller, indoor unit and outdoor unit can be understood by calling the service  
monitor mode from the remote controller.  
<Procedure>  
CL  
TEST  
1
Push  
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds to  
call the service monitor mode.  
The service monitor goes on, the master indoor unit No. is  
displayed at first and then the temperature of item code 00 is  
displayed.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
ò
TEMP.  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
2
Push temperature set  
buttons and then change  
the item code of data to be monitored.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
The item code list is shown below.  
2 4 1  
<Operation procedure>  
3
1 2 3 4  
Returned to usual display  
Item code  
Data name  
Room temperature  
Unit  
Item code  
Data name  
Unit  
01  
°C  
60  
61  
62  
63  
65  
6A  
F1  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Coil) temperature (TE)  
Outside temperature (TO)  
°C  
°C  
(Remote controller)  
02  
03  
Indoor suction temperature (TA)  
°C  
°C  
Compressor discharge temperature (TD)  
Compressor suction temperature (TS)  
Heat sink temperature (THS)  
°C  
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)  
temperature (TCJ)  
°C  
°C  
04  
F3  
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)  
temperature (TC)  
°C  
Operation current (× 1/10)  
A
Filter sign time  
×1h  
Compressor calculated operation time  
×100h  
ò
UNIT LOUVER  
3
4
Push  
button to select the indoor unit to be monitored.  
Each data of the indoor unit and its outdoor units can be monitored.  
ò
TEST  
Pushing  
button returns the status to the usual display.  
1 The indoor discharge temperature of item code [F8] is the estimated value from TC or TCJ sensor.  
Use this value to check discharge temperature at test run.  
(A discharge temperature sensor is not provided to this model.)  
• The data value of each item is not the real time, but value delayed by a few seconds to ten-odd seconds.  
• If the combined outdoor unit is one before 2 or 3 series, the outdoor unit data [6D], [70], [72] and [73]  
are not displayed.  
– 116 –  
n Calling of error history  
<Contents>  
The error contents in the past can be called.  
<Procedure>  
SET  
TEST  
1
Push  
+
buttons simultaneously for  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
4 seconds or more to call the service check mode.  
Service Check goes on, the item code 01 is displayed, and  
then the content of the latest alarm is displayed. The number  
and error contents of the indoor unit in which an error oc-  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
2 curred are displayed.  
In order to monitor another error history, push the set  
temperature buttons to change the error  
history No. (Item code).  
/
Item code 01 (Latest) Item code 04 (Old)  
NOTE : 4 error histories are stored in memory.  
2 3 1  
TEST  
3
Pushing  
button returns the display to usual display.  
<Operation procedure>  
1 2 3  
REQUIREMENT  
CL  
Returned to usual display  
Do not push  
button, otherwise all the error histories of the  
indoor unit are deleted.  
(Group control operation)  
In a group control, operation of maximum 8 indoor units can be controlled by a remote controller.  
The indoor unit connected with outdoor unit (Individual/Master of twin) controls room temperature according to  
setting on the remote controller.  
<System example>  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Master  
2-1  
1-1  
3-1  
4-1  
7-1  
Max. 8 units  
Remote controller  
1. Display range on remote controller  
The setup range (Operation mode/Air volume select/Setup temp) of the indoor unit which was set to the  
master unit is reflected on the remote controller.  
2. Address setup  
Turn on power of the indoor unit to be controlled in a group within 3 minutes after setting of automatic  
address.  
If power of the indoor unit is not turned on within 3 minutes (completion of automatic address setting), the  
system is rebooted and the automatic address setting will be judged again.  
1) Connect 3 In/Out cables surely.  
2) Check line address/indoor address/group address of the unit one by one.  
3) The unit No. (line/indoor gout address) which have been set once keep the present status as a rule if the  
unit No. is not duplicated with one of another unit.  
– 117 –  
n Indoor unit power-ON sequence  
Power ON  
• The unit without power feed waits entirely  
Waiting status is released by system start  
• Reboot when power is fed on the way  
<By feed unit>  
<Automatic  
address judgment>  
Not normal  
NO  
3 minutes elapse  
Gr construction check  
YES  
Normal  
Gr normal  
1) There is no duplicated indoor unit address.  
2) There is no invalid indoor unit address.  
3) Individual unit and master/follower units  
are not intermingled.  
4) Only a unit for individual.  
5) A master indoor unit and 1 or more  
follower indoor units for Gr.  
System start  
Automatic address starts.  
(Approx. 1 minute up to finish)  
<Initial communication>  
Outdoor model distinction (10 seconds) (Indoor unit)  
Twin Master/follower distinction (Indoor unit)  
Gr construction, louver information (Remote controller)  
<Cautions at test run>  
• Power supply/Indoor/Outdoor serial and Gr wiring: OK  
• Powers of all indoor units are turned on within 3 minutes.  
• Reception time for remote controller operation  
(After power supply was turned on)  
1) When address is OK : Approx. 50 seconds  
2) In AUTO address  
: Approx. 4 to 5 minutes  
Remote controller operation is available.  
(Approx. 50 seconds after power-ON)  
<Usual regular  
communication>  
Regular communication between indoor units (Every 30 seconds) (Master/Follower)  
Regular communication on the identical pipe (every 30 seconds) (Twin Master/Follower)  
(When the above status changes, immediately communicates.)  
(Repetition)  
• In a group operation, if the indoor unit which was fed power after judgment of automatic address cannot  
receive regular communication from the master unit and regular communication on identical pipe within  
120 seconds after power was turned on, it reboots (system reset).  
The operation starts from judgment of automatic address (Gr construction check) again.  
(If the address of the master unit was determined in the previous time, the power fed to the master unit and  
reboot works, the master unit may change though the indoor unit line address is not changed.)  
– 118 –  
12-2. Setup at Local Site / Others  
Model name:TCB-PCNT30TLE2  
12-2-1. TCC-LINK Adapter (For TCC-LINK Central Control)  
1. Function  
This model is an optional P.C. board to connect the indoor unit to TCC-LINK (Central controller).  
2. Microprocessor block diagram  
Indoor unit  
Central controller  
TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board  
CN40  
CN050  
Indoor control  
P.C. board  
CN041  
CN51  
TCC-LINK  
communication circuit  
Terminal  
resistance  
SW01  
MCC-1440  
Terminal block  
(A, B)  
TCC-LINK  
Communication units  
Communication distance : 2000 m  
: Total 64 units  
Remote controller  
3. TCC-LINK wiring connection  
CAUTION  
1) When controlling customized setup collectively, TCC-LINK adapter (This option) is required.  
2) In case of group operation or twin operation, the adapter is necessary to be connected to the main unit.  
3) Connect the central control devices to the central control system wiring.  
4) When controlling collectively customized setup only, turn on only Bit 1 of SW01 of the least line of the system  
address No. (OFF when shipped from the factory)  
In case of customized setup, the address is necessary to be set up again from the wired remote  
controller after automatic addressing.  
Central control device  
Central control device  
Central control devices: Max. 10 units  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
Refrigerant line 1  
Refrigerant line 2  
Refrigerant line 3  
1 2 3  
Refrigerant line 4  
1 2 3  
Outdoor unit  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
Indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire (AC230V serial)  
Central control system wiring  
Caution 3  
* Wiring for No.1 and 2 only  
Master  
unit  
Sub  
unit  
Sub unit  
Master unit  
Indoor unit  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
A B  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
A B  
A B  
TCC-LINK adapter  
This product  
(
)
Caution 1  
Caution 2  
sold separately  
Remote controller  
wiring  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Group operation (Max. 8 units)  
Indoor units in all refrigerant lines: Max. 64 units  
Twin operation  
[If mixed with multi model (Link wiring), multi indoor units are included.]  
* However group sub units and twin sub units of customized setup are not included in number of the units.  
– 119 –  
4. Wiring specifications  
No. of wires  
Size  
• Use 2-core with no polar wire.  
Up to 1000m: twisted wire 1.25mm2  
Up to 2000m: twisted wire 2.0mm2  
2
• Match the length of wire to wire length of the central  
control system.  
If mixed in the system, the wire length is lengthened with all indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire length at side.  
To prevent noise trouble, use 2-core shield wire.  
• Connect the shield wire by closed-end connection and apply open process (insulating process) to the last  
terminal. Ground the earth wire to 1 point at indoor unit side. (In case of central controlling of digital inverter  
unit setup)  
CAUTION  
1) Closed-end connection of shield wire (Connect all the connecting parts of each indoor unit)  
2) Apply open process to the last terminal (insulating process).  
3) Ground earth wire to 1 point at indoor unit side.  
Central control device  
U1 U2  
Caution 2  
Caution 1  
Caution 3  
Central control system wiring  
Outdoor unit  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
: TCC-LINK adapter  
(This option)  
Master  
unit  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
Sub unit  
1 2 3  
Sub unit  
Master unit  
Indoor unit  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
1 2 3  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
A B  
A B  
A B  
Earth terminal  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
(Group operation)  
(Twin operation)  
5. P.C. board switch (SW01) setup  
When performing collective control by customized setup only, the setup of terminator is necessary.  
• Using SW01, set up the terminator.  
• Set up the terminator to only the adapter connected to the indoor unit of least line address No.  
Central control device  
Central control device  
Central control devices: Max. 10 units  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
Refrigerant line 1  
Outdoor unit  
Refrigerant line 2  
Refrigerant line 3  
1 2 3  
Refrigerant line 4  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
Indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire (AC230V serial)  
Central control system wiring  
* Wiring for No.1 and 2 only  
Master  
unit  
Sub  
unit  
Sub unit  
Master unit  
Indoor unit  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
1 2 3  
A B  
Remote controller wiring  
Remote controller Remote controller  
Group operation (Max. 8 units)  
1 2 3  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
A B  
A B  
A B  
TCC-LINK adapter  
This product  
sold separately  
(
)
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Twin operation  
Line address  
SW01 Bit 1  
SW01 Bit 2  
Remarks  
1
ON  
OFF  
2
OFF  
OFF  
4
OFF  
OFF  
(OFF at shipment from factory)  
(OFF at shipment from factory)  
Turn SW01 Bit 1 to ON. As status shipped from factory  
As status shipped from factory  
(Reference) Setup contents of switch  
SW01  
Terminator  
Remarks  
Bit 1  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
Bit 1  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
None  
100Ω  
75Ω  
Mixed with multi (Link wiring) at shipment from factory  
Central control by digital inverter only  
Spare  
Spare  
ON  
43Ω  
– 120 –  
6. External view of P.C. board assembly  
Terminator (SW01)  
52  
85  
7. Address setup  
In addition to set up the central control address, it is necessary to change the indoor unit number.  
(Line/Indoor/Group address). For details, refer to TCC-LINK Adapter Installation Manual.  
12-3. How to Set up Central Control Address Number  
When connecting the indoor unit to the central control remote controller using TCC-LINK adapter, it is neces-  
sary to set up the central control address number.  
• The central control address number is displayed as the line No. of the central control remote controller.  
1. Setup from remote controller at indoor unit side  
If you use the network adapter P.C. board, it is effective only when No. 7 of setup switch SW01 on P.C.  
board is turned off.  
<Procedure> Perform setup while the unit stops.  
VENT  
TEST  
1
Push  
When group control is executed, first the unit No.  
control are selected. In this time, fans of all the selected indoor units are turned on. (Fig. 1)  
+
buttons for 4 seconds or more.  
is displayed and all the indoor units in the group  
UNIT LOUVER  
(Keep  
displayed status without pushing  
button.)  
In case of individual remote controller which is not group-controlled, Line address and Indoor unit address  
are displayed.  
TEMP.  
2
3
Using temperature setup  
buttons, specify item code 03.  
TIME  
Using timer time  
buttons, select the setup data.  
The setup data is shown in the table below (Table 1).  
SET  
4
5
Push  
button. (OK if display goes on.)  
(Fig.1)  
To change the item to be set up, return to Procedure 2.  
TEST  
Push  
button.  
The status returns to usual stop status.  
(Table 1)  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
Setup data  
Central control address No.  
TIMER SET  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
2
1
0001  
0002  
0003  
:
1
2
3
TIME  
3
1
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
:
0064  
64  
0099  
Unset (Setup at shipment from factory)  
4
5
– 121 –  
2. How to confirm the central control address  
(New function for AMT32E remote controller)  
<Procedure> It can be confirmed even during operation or stopping.  
UNIT LOUVER  
1
2
Push  
button for 4 seconds or more.  
ò
In the frame at left side of the remote controller screen, the lighting set contents are  
displayed.  
During unset time, 0099 (At shipment from factory) is displayed.  
ò
After lighting display for 3 seconds, the display automatically disappears.  
3
If any button is pushed during display, immediately the display disappears and then the pushed button is  
displayed.  
3. How to set contents of save operation  
In combination with outdoor units before 4 series, the displayed setup value exchanges, but the real operation is  
“75% fixed”.  
SAVE  
1
2
Push  
for 4 seconds or more during stop of the operation.  
flashes.  
UNIT LOUVER  
Push  
(At the left side of the button) and select the unit to be set.  
• Every pushing the button, the unit No. changes.  
The fan of the selected unit rotates and the louver swings.  
UNIT No.  
1–1  
UNIT No.  
1–2  
UNIT No.  
1–3  
UNIT No. 1–4  
3
Determine the capacity restricted value when pushing the save button of TIMER SET  
/
.
• Every pushing the button, the capacity restricted value can be set at 1% interval in the range between  
100% and 50%.  
The setting at shipment is 75%.  
Setup value at saving  
SET  
TEST  
4
Push  
and then push  
to finish the setup.  
– 122 –  
4. When installing separately sold filters  
REQUIREMENT  
• When you use this air conditioner for the first time, it takes approx. 5 minutes until the remote controller becomes  
available after power-on. This is normal.  
<When power is turned on for the first time after installation>  
Approx. 5 minutes  
It takes approx. 5 minutes until the remote controller  
Remote  
becomes available.  
“SETTING”  
flashes  
“SETTING”  
goes out  
Power ON  
controller  
is available  
<When power is turned on for the second (or later) time>  
Approx. 1 minute  
Remote  
It takes approx. 1 minute until the remote controller  
“SETTING”  
flashes  
“SETTING”  
goes out  
becomes available.  
Power ON  
controller  
is available  
• Normal settings were made when the indoor unit  
was shipped from factory. Change the indoor unit settings as required.  
• Use the wired remote controller to change the settings.  
The settings cannot be changed using the wireless remote controller, sub remote controller, or remote-  
controllerless system (for central remote controller only).  
Therefore, install the wired remote controller to change the settings.  
n Changing of settings of for applicable controls  
Basic procedure for changing settings  
Change the settings while the air conditioner is not working.  
(Be sure to stop the air conditioner before making settings.)  
1
3
Procedure 1  
4
TEST  
Push  
button and temp. setup  
/
button  
5
simultaneously for at least 4 seconds.  
6
1
After a while, the display flashes as shown in the  
figure. Confirm that the CODE No. is [01].  
2
TEST  
• If the CODE No. is not [01], push  
the display content, and repeat the procedure from  
the beginning.  
button to erase  
Procedure 4  
Using timer time  
/
buttons, select SET DATA  
(No operation of the remote controller is accepted for  
[
].  
∗∗∗∗  
TEST  
a while after  
button is pushed.)  
Procedure 5  
Push  
SET  
button. When the display changes from  
flashing to lit, the setup is completed.  
To change settings of another indoor unit, repeat  
from Procedure 2.  
To change other settings of the selected indoor unit,  
repeat from Procedure 3.  
(Display content varies with the indoor unit model.)  
SET  
Use  
button to clear the settings.  
SET  
To make settings after  
from Procedure 2.  
button was pushed, repeat  
Procedure 2  
UNIT LOUVER  
Each time you push  
button, indoor unit  
Procedure 6  
When settings have been completed, push  
numbers in the control group change cyclically.  
Select the indoor unit you want to change settings for.  
TEST  
button  
to determine the settings.  
The fan of the selected unit runs. You can confirm the  
indoor unit for which you want to change settings.  
TEST  
When  
button is pushed, “SETTING” flashes and  
then the display content disappears and the air  
conditioner enters the normal stop mode.  
(While “SETTING” is flashing, no operation of the  
remote controller is accepted.)  
∗∗  
-
∗∗  
∗  
Procedure 3  
Using temp. setup  
No. [ ].  
/
buttons, specify CODE  
∗∗  
– 123 –  
When wireless remote controller is used  
n Setup of external static pressure  
Change the external static pressure setting with the  
DIP switch on the receiver section P.C. board.  
Be sure to set up a tap change based upon the  
resistance (external static pressure) of the duct  
to be connected.  
For details, refer to the manual of the wireless  
remote controller kit.  
To set up a tap change, follow to the basic  
operation procedure  
The settings can also be changed with the switch on  
the indoor microcomputer P.C. board.  
(1 2  
3 4 5 6 ).  
However, once the setting is changed, setting to  
0001 or 0006 is possible but setting to 0000  
requires a setting data change to 0000 using the  
wired remote controller (separately sold) with the  
normal switch setting (factory setting).  
• Specify [5d] to the item code in procedure 3.  
• For the setup data of procedure 4, select a  
setup data of the external static pressure to be  
set up from the following table.  
<Change on wired remote controller>  
Setup data  
0000  
External static pressure  
10 Pa  
Standard (At shipment)  
High static pressure 1  
High static pressure 2  
High static pressure 3  
0001  
20 Pa  
35 Pa  
50 Pa  
0003  
0006  
SW501-1  
SW501-2  
MCU (IC501)  
Setup data  
SW501-1  
SW501-2  
0000  
(Factory shipping)  
OFF  
OFF  
0001  
0003  
0006  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
To restore the factory settings  
To return the DIP switch settings to the factory  
settings, set SW501-1 and SW501-2 to OFF, con-  
nect a separately sold wired remote controller, and  
then set the data of CODE No. [5d] to “0000” in  
“Setup of external static pressure” on this page.  
– 124 –  
n Change of lighting time of filter sign  
n How to set up power saving mode  
SAVE  
According to the installation condition, the lighting  
time of the filter sign (Notification of filter clean-  
ing) can be changed.  
1. Push  
button for at least four seconds  
when the air conditioner is not working.  
flashes. Indicates CODE No. “C2.”  
Follow to the basic operation procedure  
2. Select an indoor unit to be set by pushing  
UNIT LOUVER  
(1 2  
3 4 5 6 ).  
(left side of the button).  
• For the CODE No. in Procedure 3, specify [01].  
• For the [Set data] in Procedure 4, select the  
setup data of filter sign lighting time from the  
following table.  
Each time you push the button, unit numbers  
change as follows:  
Unit No.  
1-1  
Unit No.  
1-2  
Unit No.  
1-3  
Setup data  
0000  
Filter sign lighting time  
None  
Unit No.  
1-4  
0001  
150H  
2500H (At shipment from factory)  
5000H  
0002  
The fan of the selected unit runs.  
0003  
3. Adjust the power save setting by pushing  
0004  
10000H  
TIME  
/
buttons. Each push of the  
button changes the power level by 1% within  
the range from 100% to 50%.  
* The factory setting is 75%.  
n To secure better effect of heating  
• This indication may not be true for types  
other than 4-series outdoor unit.  
When it is difficult to obtain satisfactory heating  
due to installation place of the indoor unit or  
structure of the room, the detection temperature  
of heating can be raised.  
Also use a circulator, etc. to circulate heat air  
near the ceiling.  
Follow to the basic operation procedure  
(1 2  
3 4 5 6 ).  
• For the CODE No. in Procedure 3, specify [06].  
• For the set data in Procedure 4, select the  
setup data of shift value of detection tempera-  
ture to be set up from the table below.  
Setting of power level  
in power saving mode  
Setup data  
0000  
Detection temp shift value  
SET  
4. Determine the setting by pushing  
button.  
No shift  
TEST  
5. Push  
button to complete the setting.  
0001  
+1°C  
0002  
+2°C (At shipment from factory)  
0003  
+3°C  
+4°C  
+5°C  
+6°C  
0004  
0005  
0006  
– 125 –  
12-4. Outdoor Unit  
12-4-1. Refrigerant Recovery Control  
The “ozone destruction coefficient” of HFC refrigerant is 0 and the discharge regulation is set as anathermal  
effect gas.  
To this model, a switch which can perform the refrigerant recovery (pump down) by the outdoor unit is mounted  
so that it is easy to react against the environment at reinstalling or rejection time.  
[Operation method]  
<SP56>  
1) See the mode of the indoor unit to fan mode.  
2) Push the refrigerant recovery switch (SW802) of the outdoor unit for approx. 2 seconds.  
The cooling operation starts. (This operation finishes after 10 minutes.)  
3) After operation for 3 minutes or more, close the valve at liquid side.  
4) After recovering refrigerant, close the valve at gas side.  
5) When keeping pushed the refrigerant recovery SW again for approx. 2 seconds, the outdoor unit stops.  
6) Stop the indoor unit and then turn off the power supply.  
Sub SW P.C. board of  
model with 3HP or below  
SW802  
Refrigerant recovery  
SW  
Refrigerant recovery  
SW  
ON  
SW801  
Exchange  
to Cooling  
only  
Existing  
piping  
N
Power saving  
Sub SW P.C. board  
NOTE  
The electric portion of the refrigerant recovery SW on the sub-board  
is electrified, therefore be careful to an electric shock.  
W804: All OFF (As initial status)  
SW801: Push for 1 second.  
<SP80>  
1) Set the mode of the indoor unit to fan mode.  
2) Set all DIP switch SW804 to OFF (Initial status) and then push  
the button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second.  
The D805 (Green LED)  
flashes.  
The cooling operation starts.  
(During this time, D805 (Green LED) flashes.)  
D800  
D801  
D802  
D803  
D804  
D805  
This operation finishes by 10 minutes.  
3) After operation for 3 minutes or more, close valve at liquid side.  
4) After recovery of refrigerant, close valve at gas side.  
5) Push the button switch SW801 again for approx. 1 second.  
The outdoor unit stops.  
6) Stop the indoor unit and then turn off the power supply.  
– 126 –  
12-4-2. Various Setting on Outdoor Unit (Existing piping, Power save, Cooling-only, etc.)  
The following settings are available by DIP switch setup and jumper line setup.  
<SP56>  
Function  
Setting position  
Control contents  
Existing piping  
setup  
Turn off the switches. (Ø19.1 existing pipes cannot be used.)  
SW801  
ON  
When using the power saving function, turn on switches.  
The control to lower the compressor frequency (approx. -10%) is performed  
by indoor heat exchanger temp. in heating operation.  
Power save  
setup  
1
2
3
Existing pipe setting  
Power saving setting  
Cooling only setting  
When using the outdoor unit as a cooling-only machine, turn on switches.  
(“OF” of DN cord on the remote controller also can be used for changing the  
machine to the cooling-only model.)  
Cooling-only  
setup  
<SP80>  
Function  
Set position  
Control contents  
Turn the switch to ON when mounting a duct to the discharge port of the  
outdoor unit. Add 3 taps to the upper limit value of the outdoor fan tap.  
The operation is performed with  
(Max: Upper fan: 890 rpm / Lower fan: 910 rpm (WF)).  
High static  
pressure setup  
SW802  
In this case, the upper limit value of static pressure for duct is 5Pa or less on  
25°C degrees and please use straight duct.  
High static pressure setup  
Existing piping setup  
Power save setup  
In this case, the outdoor noise level may increase.  
Turn the switch to ON when Ø19.1 is used for the existing pipe.  
Existing  
piping setup  
In this case, the heating capacity may lower according to outside temp. and  
indoor temp. in heating operation.  
Snow-proof fan control  
Turn the switch to ON when using the power save function.  
Power save  
setup  
The control to lower the compressor frequency (Approx. –10%) is performed  
by indoor heat exchanger temp. in heating operation.  
all are OFF at shipment.  
When snow enters from clearance of the fan guard or heat exchanger into  
blast path and it is accumulated, the control to prevent generation of motor  
lock is validated.  
Snow-proof  
fan control  
When outside temp. is below 0°C though the compressor stops, the outdoor  
fan operates with W5.  
The defrost interval is cut to shorten it than the standard status.  
Defrost  
time change  
J805, J806  
For contents of control and cutting method, refer to Section  
9-1-10. Defrost control.  
When it is needed to lower the maximum value of the compressor frequency,  
cut the jumper line. Max. frequency at cooling/heating is lowered.  
In this case the Max. capacity decreases.  
Max. frequency of compressor  
Max. frequency  
change  
J807  
RAV-SP80  
Model  
COOL  
HEAT  
Standard status  
When J807 is cut  
72.0  
99.6  
72.0  
79.2  
When using the air conditioner as a cooling-only conditioner, cut the jumper  
line. (An air conditioner can be changed to cooling-only conditioner by “0F” of  
DN code on the remote controller.)  
Cooling-only  
setup  
J808  
– 127 –  
12-4-3. Service Support Function (LED Display, Switch Operation)  
<SP80 only>  
1. Outline  
A various setup and operation check can be performed by DIP switches at 3 positions (SW802, SW803,  
SW804) and the pushdown button switches (SW800, SW801) at 2 positions.  
Operation part  
Part No.  
SW800  
SW803  
SW801  
SW804  
SW802  
Specifications  
Pushdown button switch  
DIP switch  
Operation contents  
Exchanges the displayed contents of LED (D800 to D804) on the outdoor  
control P.C. board.  
Pushdown button switch  
DIP switch  
Performs the specific operation to check maintenance.  
Performs various initial settings. (Refer to 12-4-2.)  
DIP switch  
Display part  
Part No.  
Specifications  
Operation contents  
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display  
(Receive signal from indoor signal)  
D502  
Orange LED  
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display  
(Send signal from outdoor signal)  
D503  
Green LED  
Yellow LED  
Error display  
When all SW803 are OFF, or when any of D800 to D804 goes on, LED  
displays that the outdoor controller detects an error.  
D800 to D804  
When status of SW803 is other than OFF, various indications are displayed.  
Power-ON display  
When the power of the outdoor unit is turned on, LED goes on.  
When SW801 and SW804 operate the specific operation, LED flashes.  
D805  
Green LED  
All LED are colorless when it goes off.  
SW804 Specific operation switch  
SW801 (Various operations during maintenance check operation)  
SW800  
LED display select switch  
SW803  
D800 (Yellow LED)  
D801 (Yellow LED)  
D802 (Yellow LED)  
D803 (Yellow LED)  
D804 (Yellow LED)  
Error display / various display  
D800  
D801  
D802  
D803  
D804  
D805  
D805 (Green LED) : Display while power is ON  
D503 (Green LED) : Serial signal (Outdoor Indoor)  
D502 (Orange LED) : Serial signal (Indoor Outdoor)  
SW802 : Selection of various initial settings  
– 128 –  
2. Selection of LED display (SW800, SW803 operation)  
1) Display selection list  
The displayed contents of LED D800 to D804 on the outdoor control P.C. board can be exchanged by  
operation of SW803.  
Switch  
Function / Contents  
Refer  
Error display (Error generating at present)  
Error generating at present is displayed.  
Refer to  
Page 130.  
SW803  
This switch goes off when an error does not generate.  
Error display (The latest error: Latest error including present)  
Refer to  
Page 130.  
After error status was cleared, the error which generated before  
can be confirmed by this setting. (Reconfirmation is available  
even if power supply was turned off once.)  
SW803  
• If an error generates at present, the same contents as those of  
error which is generating at present are displayed.  
• Only error of TO sensor is not displayed by this setting.  
(Confirm it by setting of error which is generating at present.)  
Temperature sensor display  
Refer to  
Page 131.  
TD  
SW803  
TE  
SW803  
TS  
SW803  
The detected value of temperature sensor is displayed.  
TO  
SW803  
TL  
SW803  
TH  
SW803  
TA  
SW803  
TC  
SW803  
TCJ  
SW803  
Current display  
Refer to  
Page 131.  
SW803  
SW803  
SW803  
The current value which flows in the outdoor unit is displayed.  
Compressor operation frequency display  
Refer to  
Page 131.  
The operation frequency of the compressor is displayed.  
PMV opening display  
Refer to  
Page 131.  
The opening of PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) is displayed.  
– 129 –  
2) Error display  
The error which is generating at present and the latest error (Latest error information including present)  
can be confirmed by lighting LED D800 toD804 on the outdoor control P.C. board.  
a) When all DIP switch SW803 are OFF, the status of error which is generating at present is displayed.  
b) <1> only of DIP switch SW803 is turned on, the error which generated before  
(Latest error information including present) is displayed.a)  
c) If there is an error, any of LED D800 to D804 goes on. (Display 1)  
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW800 for approx. 1 second, the display is exchanged.  
(Display 2)  
e) When pushing SW800 again or after 2 minutes, the status returns to that of Display  
.

(Legend)  
Present error  
Latest error  
SW803  
SW803  
D800 (Yellow)  
D801 (Yellow)  
D802 (Yellow)  
D803 (Yellow)  
D804 (Yellow)  
D805 (Green)  
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
: Go on,  
: Flash  
l : Go off,  
¡
¥
Display 1)  
Display 2)  
Wired remote controller  
Error code  
Error contents  
(Initial display) (SW800 operation)  
Normal  
F04  
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll  
lllll  
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error  
Outside temp. sensor (TO) error  
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error  
Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error  
Heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS) miswiring  
EEPROM error  
¥
ll ll  
F06  
¥¥  
l
ll  
F06, F07  
F08  
¥¥¥  
ll  
¥ ¡  
lll l  
¡¡  
¡¡  
ll  
F06, F12  
F13, L29  
F06, F15  
F31, L29  
H01  
¥¥ ¡  
l
ll  
¥ ¥¥ ¡  
l l  
¥¥¥¥ ¡  
l
¥¥¥¥¥¡  
Compressor break down  
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
llll  
Compressor lock  
H02  
¥
l lll  
¡ ¡¡  
ll l  
Current detection circuit error  
Case thermostat operation  
Model unset  
H03  
¥¥  
lll  
H04, P04  
L10, L29  
L29  
¥
ll ll  
¥ ¥ ¡  
l l l  
Communication error between MCU  
Other error (Compressor disorder, etc.)  
Discharge temp. error  
¡¡ ¡¡  
l
¥ ¥¥¥¡  
l
l
Error is not determined.  
P03  
¥¥¥¥¥¡  
¥¥  
¡
¡
¡
lll  
Power supply error  
P04, P05  
P07, L29  
P15, L29  
P19, L29  
P04, P20  
P22  
¥ ¥  
l ll  
Heat sink overheat error  
¥¥¥  
ll  
Gas leak detection  
¥¥¥¥ ¡  
l
4-way valve reverse error  
¡¡¡ ¡¡  
l
¥¥  
¥¡  
ll  
High pressure protective operation  
Fan system error  
¥ ¥¡  
ll l  
¥¥ ¥¡  
l
l
Driving element short-circuit  
Position detection circuit erro  
P26  
¥ ¥¥¡  
l l  
P29  
¥ ¥¥¥¡  
l
As the error code displayed on the wired remote controller may differ according to type of indoor model, multiple  
codes are described.  
– 130 –  
3) Sensor, current, compressor operation frequency, PMV opening display  
The values detected by the controller, such as temperature sensor or current value are simply confirmed.  
(Legend)  
D800 (Yellow)  
D801 (Yellow)  
D802 (Yellow)  
D803 (Yellow)  
D804 (Yellow)  
D805 (Green)  
l
l
l
l
l
¡
: Go on  
l : Go off,  
¡
Temperature sensor (°C)  
Compressor  
operation  
frequency  
(rpm)  
PMV  
opening  
(Pulse)  
Current  
(A)  
TD  
SW803  
TE  
TS  
SW803  
TO  
SW803  
TL  
SW803  
Item  
setup  
SW803  
SW803  
SW803  
SW803  
TH  
SW803  
TA  
SW803  
TC  
SW803  
TCJ  
SW803  
LED  
display  
Below –25  
–25 to –21  
–20 to –16  
–15 to –11  
–10 to – 5  
–5 to –1  
0 to 4  
0 to 0.9  
1 to 1.9  
0 to 4  
5 to 9  
0 to 19  
20 to 39  
40 to 59  
60 to 79  
80 to 99  
100 to 119  
120 to 139  
140 to 159  
160 to 179  
180 to 199  
200 to 219  
220 to 239  
240 to 259  
260 to 279  
280 to 299  
300 to 319  
320 to 339  
340 to 359  
360 to 379  
380 to 399  
400 to 419  
420 to 439  
440 to 459  
460 to 479  
480 to 499  
500  
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll  
¡
llll  
¡
2 to 2.9  
10 to 14  
15 to 19  
20 to 24  
25 to 29  
30 to 34  
35 to 39  
40 to 44  
45 to 49  
50 to 54  
55 to 59  
60 to 64  
65 to 69  
70 to 74  
75 to 79  
80 to 84  
85 to 89  
80 to 84  
95 to 99  
100 to 104  
105 to 109  
110 to 114  
115 to 119  
120 to 124  
125 to 129  
130 to 134  
135 to 139  
140 to 144  
145 to 149  
150 to 154  
Over 155  
l lll  
3 to 3.9  
¡¡  
lll  
4 to 4.9  
¡
ll ll  
5 to 5.9  
¡ ¡  
l ll  
6 to 6.9  
¡¡  
l
¡¡¡  
ll  
ll  
5 to 9  
7 to 7.9  
10 to 14  
15 to 19  
20 to 24  
25 to 29  
30 to 34  
35 to 39  
40 to 44  
45 to 49  
50 to 54  
55 to 59  
60 to 64  
65 to 69  
70 to 74  
75 to 79  
80 to 84  
85 to 89  
90 to 94  
95 to 99  
100 to 104  
105 to 109  
110 to 114  
115 to 119  
Over 120  
8 to 8.9  
¡ ¡  
lll l  
¡
9 to 9.9  
¡ ¡  
ll l  
¡ ¡ ¡  
l l l  
10 to 10.9  
11 to 11.9  
12 to 12.9  
13 to 13.9  
14 to 14.9  
15 to 15.9  
16 to 16.9  
17 to 17.9  
18 to 18.9  
19 to 19.9  
20 to 20.9  
21 to 21.9  
22 to 22.9  
23 to 23.9  
24 to 24.9  
25 to 25.9  
26 to 26.9  
27 to 27.9  
28 to 28.9  
29 to 29.9  
30 to 30.9  
Over 31  
¡¡ ¡ ¡  
l l  
¡¡ ¡  
ll  
l
¡ ¡¡ ¡  
l
¡¡¡ ¡  
l
l
¡¡¡¡ ¡  
l
l
¡¡  
¡¡  
¡¡  
¡¡  
llll  
¡
lll  
¡
l ll  
¡¡  
ll  
¡ ¡¡  
ll l  
¡ ¡ ¡¡  
l l  
¡¡ ¡¡  
l
¡¡¡ ¡¡  
l
l
¡¡¡  
lll  
¡
ll  
l l  
¡¡¡  
¡ ¡¡¡  
¡¡ ¡¡¡  
l
¡¡¡¡  
ll  
¡ ¡¡¡¡  
l
¡¡¡¡¡  
l
¡¡¡¡¡¡  
Sensor error, unconnected  
As TD, TL and TH are sensors for high temperature, there is error at normal temperature or below position.  
For current value, the current for the outdoor unit only is displayed.  
– 131 –  
4) Specific operation for maintenance check (SW801, SW804)  
The following specific operations for the maintenance check are performed by operation of SW801 or  
SW804.  
a) Select DIP switch SW804. (See table below)  
b) Push the pushdown button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second.  
c) The following functions start. While each function starts, LED D805 (Green) flashes.  
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW801 again for approx. 1 second, when selecting  
DIP switch SW804 or when the specified time of each function elapsed, each function stops and  
LED D805 (Green) returns to the continuous lighting.  
<Specific operation>  
SW804  
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed  
Refrigerant recovery operation  
SW804  
The outdoor unit performs cooling operation. The indoor unit does not work by this operation  
alone. Therefore operate the fan beforehand. (Refer 12-4-1. Refrigerant Recovery Control)  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
Indoor cooling test run demand  
The cooling test run is performed. (Note 1)  
Indoor heating test run demand  
The heating test run is performed. (Note 1)  
Fan motor forced operation  
Drive the fan motor forcedly.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
(No operation especially)  
[NOTE]  
Although these operations can  
be performed even during  
operation, basically perform  
operation while the unit stops.  
PMV full open operation  
If performing this operation  
Open PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.  
during driving the unit, it is  
dangerous because the  
pressure may change suddenly.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
PMV full close operation  
Close PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
PMV middle opening operation  
Set PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) to middle opening  
(250 pulses).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
Note 1) Indoor cooling test run demand / Indoor heating test run demand  
Only when combining with the following indoor unit, cooling/heating operation can be performed from the  
outdoor unit.  
Test run is available: Indoor unit of 4 series and after (RAV-SM  
4UT-E etc.)  
∗∗∗  
Test run is unavailable: Indoor units other than the above-mentioned indoor units, or indoor units other  
than above-mentioned indoor units are included in the twin connection.  
Note 2) The forced test run by this setting cannot be cleared on the indoor remote controller.  
Be sure to clear the test run by operation of the outdoor unit. (Push SW801 again for 1 second.)  
– 132 –  
SW804  
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed  
4-way valve relay operation (For RY700, CN70 check)  
Turn on 4-way valve power relay (RY700).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
SW804  
[NOTE]  
In case of model adopting the self hold valve  
(RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E), the coil develops fever.  
Therefore do not perform this operation as coil is connected.  
SW804  
Self-hold valve suction operation (Exchange to heating cycle)  
(For RY700 RY701, RY705, CN701 check)  
Turn on relay RY700, RY701, RY705.  
(CN701 between  
and  
: Voltage=Approx. +198 to 380V)  

This function works for 10 seconds and then is OFF.  
SW804  
Self-hold valve separation operation (Exchange to cooling cycle)  
Turn on relay RY700.  
(CN701 between 1) and 4): Voltage=Approx. –198 to 380V)  
This function works for 10 seconds and then is OFF.  
[CAUTION]  
SV valve relay operation (For RY702, CN702 check)  
Turn on SV valve relay (RY702).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
* For RAV-SP1104AT-E to RAV-SP1404AT-E, the part is not  
mounted, so do not operate.  
SW804  
Although these operations can be  
performed even during operation,  
basically perform operation while  
the unit stops.  
If performing this operation during  
driving the unit, it is dangerous  
because the pressure may change  
suddenly.  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
Heater output relay operation (For check RY703, CN703 check)  
Turn on relay for option heater (RY703).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
Outside output relay operation (RY704, CN704)  
Turn on relay for outside output (RY704).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
(No operation especially)  
Relay operation change for outside output  
[CAUTION]  
Do not use this setting.  
– 133 –  
13. ADDRESS SETUP  
13-1. Address Setup Procedure  
When an outdoor unit and an indoor unit are connected, or when an outdoor unit is connected to each indoor  
unit respectively in the group operation even if multiple refrigerant lines are provided, the automatic address  
setup completes with power-ON of the outdoor unit.The operation of the remote controller is not accepted while  
automatic address works. (Approx. 4 to 5 minutes)  
Setup of line address of outdoor unit,  
indoor unit address, and group address  
Completion of cabling work  
NO  
Do you arbitrarily set the  
indoor unit address?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
(MANUAL)  
Is refrigerant line 1 line?  
YES  
Is group control performed?  
YES  
(To AUTO address mode)  
Do you change setting after  
automatic setting at the first time?  
YES  
Connect one remote controller with  
one indoor unit (1 : 1) tentatively with  
communication cable.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
After completion of address  
setup, change is to arbitral  
address/group manually.  
Setup of automatic  
address finishes within  
4 to 5 minutes.  
(
)
Set to all indoor units one by one.  
(
)
END  
• When the following addresses are not stored in the neutral memory (IC503) on the indoor P.C. board, a test  
run operation cannot be performed. (Unfixed data at shipment from factory)  
Item code Data at shipment  
Setup data range  
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0064 (No. 64 unit)  
Line address  
12  
13  
0099  
0099  
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0064 (No. 64 unit)  
Max. value of indoor units in the identical refrigerant line  
Indoor unit address  
0000 : Individual (Indoor units which are not controlled in a group)  
0001 : Master unit (1 indoor unit in group control)  
Group address  
14  
0099  
0002 : Sub unit (Indoor units other than master unit in group control)  
– 134 –  
13-2. Address Setup & Group Control  
<Terminology>  
Indoor unit No. : N - n = Outdoor unit line address N (Max. 30) - Indoor unit address n (Max. 64)  
Group address : 0 = Single (Not group control)  
1 = Master unit in group control  
2 = Sub unit in group control  
Master unit (= 1) : The representative of multiple indoor units in group operation sends/receives signals to/from  
the remote controllers and sub indoor units.  
(* It has no relation with an indoor unit which communicates serially with the outdoor units.)  
The operation mode and setup temperature range are displayed on the remote controller LCD.  
(Except air direction adjustment of louver)  
Sub unit (= 2)  
: Indoor units other than master unit in group operation  
Basically, sub units do not send/receive signals to/from the remote controllers.  
(Except errors and response to demand of service data)  
Header unit (Representative unit) (Master Twin)  
: This unit communicates with the indoor unit (follower) which serial-communicates with the  
outdoor units and sends/receives signal (Command from compressor) to/from the outdoor  
units as the representative of the cycle control in the indoor units of the identical line address  
within the minimum unit which configures one of the refrigerating cycles of Twin.  
Follower unit (Subordinate unit) (Sub Twin)  
: Indoor units excluding the header unit in Twin  
This unit communicates with (Header) indoor unit in the identical line address and performs  
control synchronized with (Header) indoor unit.  
This unit does not perform the signal send/receive operation with the outdoor units. :  
No judgment for serial signal error.  
13-2-1. System Configuration  
1. Single  
2. Twin  
Outdoor  
Indoor  
1-1  
Individual  
1-1  
1-2  
Sub/Follower  
(Master/Header)  
Master/Header  
Remote  
controller  
3. Single group operation  
2-1  
Sub/Header  
1-1  
Sub/Header  
4-1  
3-1  
Sub/Header  
8-1  
Sub/Header  
Master/Header  
– 135 –  
13-2-2. Automatic Address Example from Unset Address (No miswiring)  
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)  
1) Single  
1-1  
Individual  
(Master/Sub)  
2) Group operation (Twin, Triple operation)  
(Multiple outdoor units = Miltiple indoor units only with serial communication)  
2-1  
Sub/Header  
1-1  
Sub/Header  
1-2  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
Sub/Follower  
Master/Header  
Sub/Follower  
Sub/Follower  
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)  
• Header unit:  
The header unit receives the indoor unit data (thermo status) of the follower (Without identical line  
address & indoor/outdoor serial) and then finally controls the outdoor compressor matching with its own  
thermo status.The header unit sends this command information to the follower unit.  
• Follower unit:  
The follower unit receives the indoor unit data from the header (With identical line address & indoor/  
outdoor serial) and then performs the thermo operation synchronized with the header unit.  
The follower unit sends own thermo ON/OFF demand to the header unit.  
(Example)  
No. 1-1 header unit sends/receives signal to/from No. 1-2 and No. 1-3 follower units.  
(It is not influenced by the line 2 or 3 address indoor unit.)  
– 136 –  
13-2-3. Automatic Address Example from Unset Address (No miswiring)  
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)  
1) Single  
2) Twin  
3) Triple  
(1-1)  
(1-2)  
(1-1)  
1-2  
(1-2)  
(1-3)  
1-1  
Individual  
1-2  
Master/Header  
1-1  
1-3  
1-1  
Sub/Follower  
Sub/Header  
Master/Follower  
Sub/Follower  
(Master/Header)  
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)  
2. Group operation  
(Multiple outdoor units = Multiple indoor units with serial communication only, without twin)  
2-1  
Sub/Header  
1-1  
Sub/Header  
3-1  
8-1  
Sub/Header  
Master/Header  
(Max. : 8 units)  
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)  
3. Multiple groups operation  
Single  
Twin  
Triple  
2-1  
Sub/Header  
1-1  
Sub/Header  
2-3  
3-1  
Sub/Header  
3-3  
1-2  
Sub/Follower  
Master/Follower  
Sub/Follower  
2-1  
1-1  
1-2  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
Change is necessary  
Manually change addresses of the multiple follower units simultaneously from the remote controller.  
– 137 –  
13-3. Remote Controller Wiring  
• Strip off approx. 9 mm the wire to be connected.  
• For single system, use non polarity, 2 core wire is used for wiring of the remote controller.  
(0.5 mm² to 2.0 mm² wires)  
• For the synchronous twin, triple system, use 2-core shield wire (Vinyl cord for microphone 0.5 to 2.0 mm²) to  
conform to the EMC standard.  
Wiring diagram  
Terminal block for remote controller  
wiring of indoor unit  
Terminal block  
A
B
A
B
Remote controller  
unit  
Remote controller wire  
(Procured locally)  
For details of wiring/installation of the remote controller, refer to the Installation Manual enclosed with the  
remote controller.  
<Single system>  
Remote controller  
Remote controller wiring  
A
1
B
2
Indoor side  
3
3
Indoor/  
Outdoor connecting wires  
1
L
2
Outdoor side  
N
220-240V~  
– 138 –  
13-4. Address Setup (Manual setting from remote controller)  
In case that addresses of the indoor units will be  
determined prior to piping work after cabling work  
(Example of 2-lines cabling)  
(Real line: Cabling, Broken line: Refrigerant pipe)  
• Set an indoor unit per a remote controller.  
Turn on power supply.  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Indoor  
A B  
Indoor  
A B  
Indoor  
A B  
Indoor  
A B  
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
Line address 1  
Indoor unit address 1  
Group address 1  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
A B  
1
2
Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously  
for 4 seconds or more.  
Remote controller  
For the above example, perform setting by  
connecting singly the wired remote controller  
without remote controller inter-unit cable.  
(Line address)  
Using the temperature setup  
set 12 to the item code.  
/
buttons,  
Group address  
Individual : 0000  
Master unit : 0001  
3
4
5
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set the line address.  
In case of group control  
Sub unit  
: 0002  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
(Indoor unit address)  
Using the temperature setup  
/
buttons, set 13 to the item code.  
6
7
8
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set 1 to the line address.  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
(Group address)  
Using the temperature setup  
/
buttons, set 14 to the item code.  
9
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set 0000 to Individual, 0001 to Master unit, and 0002 to sub unit.  
SET  
10  
11  
Push  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
TEST  
button.  
Setup completes. (The status returns to the usual stop status.)  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
2, 5, 8  
3, 6, 9  
END 11  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
4, 7, 10  
1
<Operation procedure>  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 END  
– 139 –  
13-5. Confirmation of Indoor Unit No. Position  
1. To know the indoor unit addresses though position of the indoor unit body is recognized  
• In case of individual operation (Wired remote controller : indoor unit = 1 : 1)  
(Follow to the procedure during operation)  
<Procedure>  
ON / OFF  
1
2
Push  
button if the unit stops.  
button.  
UNIT LOUVER  
Push  
Unit No. 1-1 is displayed on LCD.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
1
(It disappears after several seconds.)  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
Operation  
The displayed unit No. indicate line address and  
indoor unit address.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
(When other indoor units are connected to the  
identical remote controller (Group control unit),  
other unit numbers are also displayed every pushing  
UNIT LOUVER  
2
button.  
<Operation procedure>  
END  
1 2  
2. To know the position of indoor unit body by address  
To confirm the unit No. in the group control  
(Follow to the procedure during operation) (in this procedure, the indoor units in group control stop.)  
<Procedure>  
The indoor unit numbers in the group control are  
successively displayed, and fan, louver, and drain pump  
of the corresponding indoor unit are turned on.  
(Follow to the procedure during operation)  
VENT  
TEST  
1
Push  
4 seconds or more.  
and  
buttons simultaneously for  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
• Unit No.  
is displayed.  
1
3
• Fans and louvers of all the indoor units in the  
group control operate.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
UNIT LOUVER  
2
Every pushing  
button, the unit numbers  
in the group control are successively dis-  
played.  
2
• The unit No. displayed at the first time indicates  
the master unit address.  
<Operation procedure>  
END  
1 2 3  
• Fan and louver of the selected indoor unit only  
operate.  
TEST  
3
Push  
button to finish the procedure.  
All the indoor units in the group control stop.  
– 140 –  
<Maintenance/Check list>  
Aiming in environmental preservation, it is strictly recommended to clean and maintain the indoor/outdoor units  
of the operating air conditioning system regularly to secure effective operation of the air conditioner.  
It is also recommended to maintain the units once a year regularly when operating the air conditioner for a long  
time.  
Check periodically signs of rust or scratches, etc. on coating of the outdoor units.  
Repair the defective position or apply the rust resisting paint if necessary.  
If an indoor unit operates for approx. 8 hours or more per day, usually it is necessary to clean the indoor/outdoor  
units once three months at least.  
These cleaning and maintenance should be carried out by a qualified dealer.  
Although the customer has to pay the charge for the maintenance, the life of the unit can be prolonged.  
Failure to clean the indoor/outdoor units regularly will cause shortage of capacity, freezing, water leakage or  
trouble on the compressor.  
Object  
Part name  
Contents of check  
Contents of maintenance  
Indoor  
¡
Outdoor  
¡
Heat exchanger  
Fan motor  
• Blocking with dust, damage check  
• Audibility for sound  
• Clean it when blocking is found.  
• When abnormal sound is heard  
¡
¡
• Clean with water if dirty  
• Replace if any breakage  
Filter  
• Visual check for dirt and breakage  
¡
¡
¡
• Visual check for swing and balance  
• Replace fan when swinging or  
balance is remarkably poor.  
• Check adhesion of dust and external  
appearance.  
Fan  
¡
• If a large dust adheres, clean it with  
brush or water.  
Suction/  
Discharge grille  
• Repair or replace it if deformation or  
damage is found.  
• Visual check for dirt and scratch  
• Check blocking by dust and dirt of drain  
water.  
Drain pan  
• Clean drain pan, Inclination check  
• Cleaning/Coating with repair painting  
¡
¡
Face panel, Louver  
• Check dirt and scratch.  
• Check rust and pealing of insulator  
External appearance  
• Coating with repair painting  
¡
• Check pealing and floating of coating film  
– 141 –  
14. DETACHMENTS  
14-1. Indoor Unit  
14-1-1. Slim DuctType  
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
REQUIREMENT  
Be sure to put on gloves at working; otherwise an injury may be caused by parts, etc.  
• Before replacement of the parts, be sure to stop operation of the air conditioner and turn off  
switch of the breaker.  
Air Filter  
1. Detachment  
1
[In case of sucking system from rear side]  
1) Push knobs (3 positions) of the air filter hooks  
Air filter  
toward the arrow direction to remove the air  
filter.  
Push  
2. Attachment  
1) Insert the air filter surely into the hooking  
grooves (4 positions) at the opposite side of the  
hooks, and then fix it to the original position.  
Hook  
NOTE)  
In case of sucking system from bottom side,  
installation direction is determined. Install the air  
filter so that hooks are aligned at discharge side.  
[In case of sucking system from bottom side]  
Air filter  
Push  
Hook  
Plate inlet-A 1. Detachment  
2
[In case of sucking system from rear side]  
Plate inlet-B  
1) Take off fixing screws while holding the plate  
Plate inlet-B: 6 screws  
inlet-A with hands to remove it.  
(Sucking system from rear side: Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs)  
(Sucking system from bottom side:  
Ø4 × 10, 11 pcs)  
2) Take off fixing screws while holding the plate  
inlet-B with hands to remove it.  
(Ø4 × 10, 6 pcs)  
Plate inlet-A: 8 screws  
NOTE)  
Be careful that sheeting metal does not fall when  
removing the plate inlet.  
[In case of sucking system from bottom side]  
Plate inlet-A: 11 screws  
2. Attachment  
1) Using the screws taken off in procedure 1. 2) of  
2
, attach the plate inlets in order of B  
A while holding them not to fall down.  
Plate inlet-B: 6 screws  
– 142 –  
No. Part name  
E-cover  
Procedure  
Remarks  
1. Detachment  
3
2
1) Perform work 1. of  
.
2) Take off screws fixing E-cover, and then  
remove hooks of the hooking part by lifting up.  
(Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)  
2. Attachment  
1) Hang on E-cover to hooks of the hooking part  
so that it does not fall down.  
E-cover  
NOTE)  
Be sure not to catch TA sensor in the E-cover;  
otherwise the equipment cannot operate correctly.  
2) Using the screws taken off in procedure 1. 2) of  
3
, attach E-cover while holding it with hands  
without clearance.  
2 screws  
Hooking part  
NOTE)  
TA sensor  
If there is clearance, dust may enter in the electric  
parts box.  
E-cover  
E-box  
1. Detachment  
4
Clamp  
Clamp  
2
3
1) Perform works 1. of  
and 1. of  
.
2) Remove clamps and tie wrap at upper part of  
the photo. (Drain pump incorporated model: 3  
positions)  
Tie wrap  
(Natural drain model: 2 positions)  
3) Take off screws fixing E-box. (Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)  
E-box does not fall down under condition that  
screws are taken off.  
4) Remove the E-box over sheeting metal which  
was fixed with screws.  
2. Attachment  
1) Insert hooks of E-box into the hooking part of  
the main body.  
Drain pump  
Lead wire:  
2 screws  
2) Store E-box as before, and then attach it by  
For only drain pump incorporated model  
4
using screws taken off in procedure 1. 3) of  
.
NOTE)  
Be sure to fix surely as before the lead wires of  
which clamps and tie wrap were taken off.  
NOTE)  
Check that lead wires of the drain pump do not  
reach the fan so that they are not caught in the  
fan, and then fix them.  
(In case of drain pump incorporated model)  
– 143 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
P.C. board  
assembly  
1. Detachment  
5
P.C. board assembly  
2
3
4
1) Perform works 1. of  
, 1. of  
, and 1. of  
.
2) Disconnect connectors which are connected  
from P.C. board assembly to other parts.  
NOTE)  
Unlock the lock of the housing to disconnect the  
connectors.  
CN41 : Remote controller terminal (2P: Blue)  
Remote controller terminal block: 2P  
CN67 : Power supply terminal (3P: Black)  
CN101 : TC sensor (2P: Black)  
CN102 : TCJ sensor (2P: Red)  
CN333 : Fan motor power supply (5P: White)  
Terminal block  
CN334 : Detection of fan motor position (3P: White)  
(In case of drain pump incorporated model)  
CN34 : Float SW (3P: Red)  
CN504 : Drain pump lead (2P: White)  
3) Unlock the lock of the card edge spacer, and then remove P.C. board assembly.  
2. Attachment  
1) Attach P.C. board assembly to the card edge spacer.  
2) Using wires connect connectors as before, which were disconnected in  
5
procedure 1. 2) of  
.
NOTE)  
Check there is no missing or poor contact of the connectors.  
Multi blade fan case, 1. Detachment  
6
fan lower case,  
2
1) Perform work 1. of  
.
Hanging hook  
fan upper case  
2) Take off hanging hooks at both sides of the  
lower fan case to remove fan lower case.  
3) Remove the upper fan case while taking off  
hooks of fan upper case which are hooked to  
the partition board.  
4) Loosen hexagonal hole screw of the multi  
blade fan to remove multi blade fan from the  
shaft. If necessary, remove multi blade fan  
and then remove fan upper case.  
Fan lower case  
2. Attachment  
1) Determine the position so that multi blade fan  
positions at the center of the fan upper case,  
and then fix it with hexagonal hole screw.  
Multi blade fan  
NOTE)  
Arrange the multi blade fan so that screws  
position at the right side against the drain pan  
assembly.  
NOTE)  
Fix multi blade fan with torque wrench 4.9 N•m  
or more.  
Drain pan  
assembly side  
2) Hook the lower fan case as before and attach  
it with hooks.  
NOTE)  
Arrange the multi blade fan so that  
screws position at the right side  
against the drain pan assembly.  
Finally check whether the multi blade fan turns  
surely and smoothly or not.  
– 144 –  
No. Part name  
Fan motor  
Procedure  
Remarks  
1. Detachment  
7
2
3
6
1) Perform works 1. of  
, 1. of  
, and 1. of  
.
2) Remove lead wires which are connected to the  
following connectors of P.C. board assembly.  
NOTE)  
Unlock locks of the housing, and then remove the  
connectors.  
CN333 : Fan motor power supply (5P: White)  
CN334 : Detection of fan motor (3P: White)  
Remove tie wrap which fixes lead wires.  
3) Remove the noise filter from lead wire to detect fan  
motor position.  
4) Take off screws of fan motor fixing bracket.  
Earth wires of the motor are tightened together.  
(Ø5 × 10, 2 pcs)  
Remove tie wrap which fixes the lead wires.  
5) Remove fixing bracket of the fan motor by holding it  
with hands so that the fan motor does not fall down.  
Earth lead  
2. Attachment  
1) Mount the fan motor as before in order, Fan motor  
Fixing bracket of fan motor Noise filter Lead wire process E-cover.  
NOTE)  
Check there is no missing or poor contact of the connectors. Check also that the multi blade fan  
turns surely and smoothly, and check together-tightening of motor earth.  
Under panel 1. Detachment  
8
Drain cap or drain hose  
Drain pan  
1) Take off the drain cap and drain the drain water  
assembly  
accumulated in the drain pan assembly.  
In case of natural drain model, drain the drain water  
by taking off hose band and drain hose.  
NOTE)  
When taking off drain cap and drain hose, be sure  
receive drain water in a bucket, etc.  
2) Take off screws fixing the under panel while holding it  
to remove. (Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs)  
Underr panel  
NOTE)  
Be careful that sheeting metal does not fall when  
removing the under panel.  
3) Pull out the drain pan assy. by holding handle at lower  
part.  
NOTE)  
When pulling out the drain pan assy, never pull out the  
drain socket by drawing it with hands. If doing so, water  
leak may be caused.  
Drain pann asseembly  
4) Pull out it to some extent, lay hand on the bump at  
suction side, and then remove the drain pan assembly.  
NO GOOD  
2. Attachment  
Never hold and pull  
the drain socket.  
1) Hook and attach the drain pan assy. to the flange at  
discharge side, and then push in.  
8
2) Using screws taken off in procedure 1. 2) of  
attach under panel by holding with hands.  
,
3) Attach drain cap, hose band, and drain hose as  
before, which were taken off in procedure 1. 1) of  
8
.
NOTE)  
Finally, be sure to check there is no water leakage from  
each attached part.  
– 145 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Drain pump, 1. Detachment  
9
Float switch,  
Drain hose  
2
3
1) Perform works in procedures 1. of  
, 1. of  
,
Drain hose  
8
1. of  
.
Hose band  
2) Disconnect lead wires which are connected to  
the following connectors of P.C. board assembly.  
Drain pump  
NOTE)  
Unlock locks of the housing to remove the  
connectors.  
CN34 : float SW (3P: Red)  
CN504 : Drain pump lead (2P: White)  
3) Loosen hose band, remove cap of the drain  
hose, and take off screws while holding drain  
pump. Remove them with care that pipes are  
not damaged. (Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs)  
4) Take off screws while holding metal on float  
switch.  
Float switch  
Remove them with care so that pipes are not  
damaged. (Ø4 × 10, 1 pc)  
NOTE)  
If the pipes are damaged, refrigerant leak may be caused. Take out them with great care.  
2. Attachment  
9
1) Attach ASSY sheeting metal which was removed in procedure 1. 3) of  
pipes are not damaged, and then fix it with screws.  
with care that  
2) Insert the drain hose into the inlet of drain pump, and then fix it with hose band. Arrange  
handle of the hose band at contrary side of heat exchanger side and at direction remote from  
drain pan assembly.  
8
3) Carry out wiring as before, and then perform work of procedure 2. of  
.
NOTE)  
Finally check whether they correctly operate or not.  
Evaporator  
assembly  
1. Detachment  
10  
1) Recover refrigerant, and then remove refriger-  
ant pipes at indoor unit side.  
2
3
2) Perform works of procedures 1. of  
, 1. of  
, 1.  
8
of  
.
Remove sensors.  
3) Take off screws of the pipe holder, and remove  
the pipe holder. (Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)  
4) Take off screws of the heat exchanger support  
board (Pipe side), and remove the heat  
exchanger support board  
(Pipe side). (Ø4 × 10, 4 pcs)  
Pipe holder  
5) Take off screws of the heat exchanger support  
board (Opposite side) which fixes terminal  
block of the evaporator assembly.  
(Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)  
Heat exchanger support board  
(Pipe side)  
6) Remove the evaporator assembly.  
2. Attachment  
1) Fasten the parts as before in order, Evaporator  
assembly Pipe holder Set sensors  
Drain pan assembly Under panel.  
2) Connect the refrigerant pipe as before, and  
then perform vacuuming.  
– 146 –  
14-2. Outdoor Unit  
14-2-1. RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E  
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Common  
1
procedure  
CAUTION  
Valve  
cover  
Never forget to put on the gloves at working  
time, otherwise an injury will be caused by  
the parts, etc.  
1. Detachment  
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner, and  
turn off the main switch of the breaker for  
air conditioner.  
2) Remove the valve cover.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 1 pc.)  
• After removing screw, remove the valve  
cover pulling it downward.  
Wiring  
cover  
3) Remove wiring cover  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.), and then remove  
connecting cable.  
4) Remove the upper cabinet.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 5 pcs.)  
• After taking off screws, remove the  
upper cabinet pulling it upward.  
2. Attachment  
Upper cabinet  
1) Attach the waterproof cover.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to attach a waterproof cover.  
If it is not attached, there is a possibility that  
water enters inside of the outdoor unit.  
Water-proof  
cover  
Cord clamp  
2) Attach the upper cabinet.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 5 pcs.)  
• Hook the rear side of the upper cabinet  
to claw of the rear cabinet, and then put  
it on the front cabinet.  
Rear cabinet  
3) Perform cabling of connecting cables, and  
fix with cord clamp.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L 3 pcs.)  
4) Attach the wiring cover.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)  
5) Attach the valve cover.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 1 pc.)  
Claw  
• Insert the upper part of the upper  
cabinet, set hooking claw of the valve  
cover to the slit (at three positions) of  
the main body, and then attach it  
pushing upward.  
– 147 –  
No. Part name  
Front cabinet 1. Detachment  
Procedure  
Remarks  
2
Motor support  
1
1) Perform work of item 1 of  
.
2) Remove screws (ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.) of  
the front cabinet and the inverter cover.  
3) Take off screws of the front cabinet and  
the bottom plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 8L 3 pcs.)  
4) Take off screws of the front cabinet and  
the motor support.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)  
• The left side of the front side if made to  
insert to the rear cabinet, so remove it  
pulling upward.  
For single-phase type models,  
also take off this screw  
Front cabinet  
3. Attachment  
Front cabinet (Left side)  
1) Insert hook at the left side of the front side  
into the rear cabinet.  
2) Hook the lower part at the right side of the  
front to concavity of the bottom plate.  
Insert the hook of the rear cabinet into the  
slit of the front cabinet.  
Slit  
Claw  
3) Attach the removed screws to the original  
positions.  
Slit  
Hook  
Cord clamp  
Front cabinet  
Concavity at  
bottom plate  
Lower  
slit  
– 148 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Inverter  
assembly  
1. Detachment  
3
Screws  
1
1) Perform work of item 1 of  
.
2) Take off screws of the upper part of the front  
cabinet.  
• If removing the inverter cover under this  
condition, P.C. board can be checked.  
Front cabinet  
• If there is no space in the upper part of the  
2
upper cabinet, perform work of  
.
Inverter cover  
CAUTION  
Be careful to check the inverter because high-  
voltage circuit is incorporated in it.  
3) Perform discharging by connecting  
,
+
polarities by discharging resistance (approx.  
100, 40W) or plug of soldering iron to  
,
+
terminals of the C14 (printed as “CAU-  
TION HIGH VOLTAGE”) electrolytic capaci-  
tor (500µF) of P.C. board.  
Cord clamp  
WARNING  
The electrolytic capacitor may not normally  
discharge according to error contents and the  
voltage may remain. Therefore, be sure to  
discharge the capacitor.  
Screws  
WARNING  
Plug of  
soldering iron  
For discharging, never use a screwdriver and  
Discharging  
position  
others for short-circuiting between  
and  
+
(Discharging  
period  
electrodes. As the electrolytic capacitor is one  
with a large capacity, it is very dangerous  
because a large electric spark will occur.  
10 seconds  
or more)  
4) Take off screws (ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)  
fixing the main body and the inverter box.  
Inverter  
assembly  
5) Remove various lead wires from the holder  
at upper part of the inverter box and wiring  
holder at right side of the terminal block.  
6) Remove the lead wire from the bundled part  
at left side of the terminal block.  
7) Pull the inverter box upward.  
8) Disconnect connectors of various lead  
wires.  
REQUIREMENT  
As each connector has a lock mechanism,  
avoid to remove the connector by holding the  
lead wire, but by holding the connector.  
Remove the connectors  
with locking function by  
pushing the part indicated  
by the arrow mark.  
– 149 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Control P.C.  
board assembly  
1) Disconnect lead wires and connectors  
connected from the control P.C. board  
assembly to other parts.  
4
1. Lead wires  
Take off  
earth screws.  
• Connection with the power terminal  
block: 3 wires (Black, White, Orange)  
• Earth wire: 1 wire (Black)  
2. Connectors  
Power line  
• Connection with compressor:  
Remove 3P connector.  
• Connection with reactor:  
Inverter box  
(Metal sheet)  
Remove the relay connectors from  
P08, 11 (2P, White) and P30, 31  
(2P, Yellow)  
Control P.C.  
board assembly  
P.C. board base  
CN300 : Outdoor fan (3P, White)  
CN701 : 4-way valve (3P, Yellow)  
CN600 : TE sensor (2P, White)  
CN601 : TD sensor (3P, White)  
CN603 : TS sensor (3P, White)  
CN602 : TO sensor (3P, White)  
CN500 : Case thermo. (2P, White)  
CN700 : PMV (6P, White)  
Hooking claws  
(4 positions)  
2) Remove the inverter box (Metal plate).  
3) Remove the control board assembly  
from P.C. board base.  
(Remove the heat sink and the control  
board assembly as they are screwed.)  
Control P.C.  
board assembly  
NOTES:  
1. CN300 and CN701, etc. at the control  
board assembly side are connectors with  
locking function.  
P.C. board base  
Therefore, remove the connector while  
pushing the part indicated by an arrow  
mark.  
2. Remove 4 hooking claws of P.C. board  
base, and remove upward the heat sink  
with hands.  
4) Take off 3 screws fixing the heat sink  
and main control board assembly side,  
and replace the board with a new one.  
NOTE:  
Heat sink  
Inverter box  
(Metal sheet)  
When mounting a new board, check that the  
board is correctly set in the groove of the  
base holder of P.C. board base.  
Attach the P.C. board so that the heat sink  
comes securely contact with the metal sheet.  
– 150 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
1
2
3
Rear cabinet 1) Perform works of items 1 of  
and  
,
.
5
2) Take off fixed screws for the bottom plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 3 pcs.)  
3) Take off fixed screws for the heat exchanger.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)  
Rear cabinet  
4) Take off fixed screw for the valve mounting  
plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 1 pc.)  
1
2
Fan motor  
1) Perform works of items 1 of  
and  
.
6
2) Take off the flange nut fixing the fan motor  
and the propeller.  
Flange nut  
Turning it clockwise, the flange nut can be  
loosened. (To tighten the flange nut, turn  
counterclockwise.)  
3) Remove the propeller fan.  
4) Disconnect the connector for fan motor from  
the inverter.  
5) Take off the fixing screws (2 pcs.) holding by  
hands so that the fan motor does not fall.  
Loosen the nut by  
turning clockwise  
NOTE:  
Tighten the flange nut with torque 4.9Nm  
(50kgf/cm).  
Propeller fan  
Fan  
motor  
– 151 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
1
2
Compressor 1) Perform works of items 1 of  
and  
,
7
3
4
5
,
,
.
Partition plate  
2) Discharge refrigerant gas.  
3) Remove the partition plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 3 pcs.)  
4) Remove the noise-insulator.  
5) Remove the terminal covers of the  
compressor, and disconnect lead wires  
of the compressor and the compressor  
thermo assembly from the terminal.  
6) Remove pipes connected to the  
compressor with a burner.  
Compressor  
lead  
CAUTION  
Pay attention to that flame does not  
involve 4-way valve or PMV. (If doing  
so, a malfunction may be caused.)  
Case thermo  
7) Take off the fixing screws of the bottom  
plate and heat exchanger.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L)  
Heat exchanger  
8) Take off the fixing screws of the valve  
clamping plate to the bottom plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)  
Remove  
(Discharge pipe)  
9) Pull upward he refrigerating cycle.  
Remove  
(Suction pipe)  
Screw  
10) Take off nut fixing the compressor to  
the bottom place.  
Valve  
support board  
Screws (2 pcs.)  
CAUTION  
Compressor bolt (3 pcs.)  
When reconnecting the lead wires to  
the compressor terminals after  
replacement of the compressor, be  
sure to caulk the Faston terminal  
without loosening.  
1
3
Reactor  
1) Perform works of item 1 of  
2) First take off two screws  
and  
.
8
Partition  
plate  
Reactor  
support board  
Reactor  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L) of the reactor fixed to  
the reactor support.  
3) Remove the reactor support from the  
partition plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 4 pcs.)  
4) Take off two screws (ST1T Ø4 × 8L)  
directly attached to the partition plate.  
– 152 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Pulse Motor Valve 1. Detachment  
9
(PMV) coil  
1
2
1) Perform works of items  
and  
.
2) Release the coil from the concavity by  
turning it, and remove coil from the PMV.  
2. Attachment  
1) Put the coil deep into the bottom posi-  
tion.  
2) Fix the coil firmly by turning it to the  
concavity.  
PMV coil  
Fan guard  
1. Detachment  
10  
Minus screwdriver  
1
2
1) Perform works of items 1 of  
and  
.
2) Remove the front cabinet, and put it  
down so that fan guard side directs  
downward.  
CAUTION  
Perform works on a corrugated cardboard,  
cloth, etc. to prevent flaw on the product.  
3) Remove the hooking claws by pushing  
with minus screwdriver along with the  
arrow mark in the right figure, and  
remove the fan guard.  
Front cabinet  
Hooking claw  
Front cabinet  
2. Attachment  
1) Insert claws of the fan guard in the hole  
of the front cabinet. Push the hooking  
claws (10 positions) with hands and then  
fix the claws.  
CAUTION  
All the attaching works have completed.  
Check that all the hooking claws are fixed  
to the specified positions.  
Fan guard  
– 153 –  
14-2-2. RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Common  
procedure  
1
Front panel  
CAUTION  
Be sure to put on the gloves at working time;  
otherwise an injury may be caused by a part,  
etc.  
1. Detachment  
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner and then  
turn off switch of the breaker.  
2) Remove the front panel.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
After removing screws, remove the front  
panel while pulling it downward.  
3) Remove the power wire and indoor/outdoor  
connecting wire from the cord clamp and the  
terminals.  
Top plate  
4) Remove the top plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)  
2. Attachment  
1) Attach the top plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)  
In this time, insert the fin guard of rear side  
between the top plate and the heat exchanger  
(Rear side).  
2) Connect the power supply wire and the  
indoor/outdoor connecting wire to the terminal  
and fix it with cord clamp.  
Insert the fin guard of rear side between  
the top plate and the heat exchanger  
(at rear side).  
CAUTION  
Using bundling band on the market, be sure to  
fix the power wire and indoor/outdoor  
connecting wire along the crossover pipe so that  
they do not come to contact with the  
compressor, valve at gas side, pipe at gas side  
and discharge pipe.  
3) Attach the front panel.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
– 154 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Discharge  
port cabinet  
1. Detachment  
2
Heat exchanger  
Discharge port cabinet  
1
1) Carry out work of 1 of  
.
Motor base Partition plate  
2) Remove screws for the discharge port cabinet  
and the partition plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 3 pcs.)  
3) Remove screws for the discharge port cabinet  
and the bottom plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove screws of the discharge port cabinet  
and the motor base. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
5) Remove screws of the discharge port cabinet  
and the heat exchanger.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
6) Remove screws of the discharge port cabinet  
and the fin guard.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
Fin guard  
1
Side cabinet 1) Carry out work of 1 of  
.
3
Inverter assembly  
Side cabinet  
2) Remove screws which fix the inverter assembly  
and the side cabinet. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
3) Remove screws of the side cabinet and the valve  
fixing plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove screws of the side cabinet and the pipe  
panel (Rear).  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
5) Remove screws of the side cabinet and the  
bottom plate. (Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)  
6) Remove screws of the side cabinet and the heat  
exchanger. (Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs.)  
7) Slide the side cabinet upward and then remove it.  
(Hook of inverter)  
Valve fixing plate  
Piping panel (Rear)  
– 155 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Exchange of 1. Control P.C. board  
electric parts  
4
Compressor lead  
1
1) Carry out work of 1 of  
.
Relay connector:  
2 positions  
Control  
P.C. board  
(1 at rear side)  
WARNING  
Fan motor  
Bundling band  
(Reactor lead)  
Never disassemble the inverter for 1 minute  
after power has been turned off because an  
electric shock may be caused.  
2) Remove the connectors connected to the  
control P.C. board.  
(Indoor power supply, temperature sensors,  
PMV coil, 4-way valve coil, compressor case  
thermo, fan motor)  
Compressor  
case thhermo  
Unlock the lock of the housing part and  
then remove the connectors.  
Temperaature  
sensor  
Reactor lead wires  
(White,Charcoal gray)  
3) Remove the lead wires connected to the  
control P.C. board.  
(Torque at tightening time: 1.47 ± 0.1N•m)  
Compressor lead  
Earth wire  
U: CN200  
V: CN201  
W: CN202 Black  
Red  
White  
4-way valvve coil  
PMV coil  
Indoor power supply  
Reactor lead  
Screw for fixing P.C. board  
Relay connector: 2 positions  
Remove the power wire from the power  
supply terminal block.  
(Torque at tightening time: 2.5 ± 0.1N•m)  
4) Remove the earth wire from the control P.C.  
board. (Truss B tight screw Ø4 × 6, 1 pc.)  
5) Remove the fixing screws of the control P.C.  
board.  
Screw for fixing element (7 positions)  
Power suppply teerrminall block  
(Screw with collar for fixing element Ø3 × 16,  
7 pcs. Pan S tight screw for fixing P.C. board  
Ø3 × 20, 1 pc.)  
6) Remove the control P.C. board.  
(Supporter: 5 positions)  
NOTE:  
It is difficult to take out it because of radiator  
grease for heat sink.  
7) Mount a new control P.C. board.  
NOTE:  
Control P.C. board Insulating sheet (Q300)  
Aluminum plate (Q201)  
Do not forget to attach the aluminum plate (Q201)  
and the insulating sheet (Q300).  
(Applying a little of radiator grease at the rear  
surface of the insulating sheet in advance to  
adhere to the heat sink makes easy the work.)  
Radiator  
grease  
– 156 –  
No. Part name  
Exchange of 1. Reactor  
Procedure  
Remarks  
4
Reactor relay connector  
(Connected to lead wire  
(White) at P.C. board side)  
electric parts  
(Continued)  
1
3
1) Carry out works of 1 of  
and  
.
2) Remove the relay connector connected to  
the control P.C. board.  
3) Cut off the bundling band binding the  
compressor lead and the relay connector.  
4) Remove each reactor.  
(Truss B tight screw Ø4 × 6, 2 pcs. each)  
5) Attach a new reactor.  
NOTE:  
Be sure to bind the removed bundling band with  
the bundling band on the market.  
Be careful that the fan motor lead does not come  
to contact with the reactor body.  
Reactor relay connector  
(Connected to lead wire  
(Charcoal gray) at P.C. board side)  
Fan motor lead  
Bundling band  
(Compressor lead, reactor lead)  
Upper reactor  
Connected to reactor relay connector  
(Connected to lead wire (White)  
at P.C. board side)  
Bundling band  
Lower reactor  
Connected to reactor relay connector  
(Connected to lead wire (Charcoal gray)  
at P.C. board side)  
– 157 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
1
2
Fan motor 1) Carry out works of 1 of  
and  
.
5
Propeller fan  
Loosened by  
turning clockwise  
2) Remove the flange nut fixing the fan motor and the  
propeller fan.  
The flange nut is loosened by turning clockwise.  
(To tighten it, turn it counterclockwise.)  
3) Remove the propeller fan.  
4) Remove the connector for fan motor from the  
inverter.  
5) Remove the fan motor lead from the fan motor  
lead fixing rubber of the penetrated part of the  
partition plate.  
Flange nut  
Propeller fan  
6) Remove the fixing screws (4 pcs. each) while  
supporting the fan motor so that it does not fall.  
Cautions when assembling the fan motor  
Tighten the flange nut with 4.95N•m  
(50kgf.cm).  
Adjust length on the fan motor lead fixing  
rubber so that the fan motor lead does not  
slacken in order not to put the fan motor lead  
into contact with the propeller fan.  
Attach the fan motor lead fixing rubber to the  
partition plate so that projection directs to the  
refrigerating cycle side.  
Fan motor  
Fan motor connector  
Be sure that the rector body does not come to  
contact with the fan motor lead.  
Be sure to bind the removed bundling band  
with the bundling band on the market.  
CAUTION  
Use the metal band of the motor base to fix the  
fan motor lead on the motor base so that the fan  
motor lead does not come to contact with the  
propeller fan.  
Inverter  
Fan motor lead fixing rubber  
Projection/Refrigerating cycle side  
Fan motor  
– 158 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Compressor  
Compressor lead  
1. Removal of broken compressor  
6
Piping pannel (Rear)  
1) Recover the refrigerant gas.  
1
2
3
2) Carry out works of 1 of  
and  
,
.
3) Remove the piping panel (Front).  
Remove screws of the piping panel  
(Front) and the bottom plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
Pipingg paneel (Front)  
Remove screws of the piping panel  
(Front) and the piping panel (Rear).  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)  
Bundlinng band  
for heat proof  
Pipe cover  
4) Remove the piping panel (Rear).  
TD sensor  
Remove screws of the piping panel  
(Rear) and the bottom plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
5) Remove the valve fixing plate.  
Remove bolts of the valve.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø6 × 15, 4 pcs.)  
Compressor  
lead  
Remove screws of the valve fixing plate  
and the partition plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
Comprressor  
case tthermo  
Remove screws of the valve fixing plate  
and the accumulator.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
TS sensor  
Pipe coover,  
bundlinng band  
Cut off the bundling band for the dis-  
charge pipe and the suction pipe and  
then remove each sensor and coil lead  
of PMV.  
6) Remove the sound insulating plate.  
(Upper side, outer winding, inner winding)  
Suction pipe  
Accumulator  
Discharge pipe  
7) Remove terminal cover from the  
compressor and then remove the  
compressor lead and also the  
compressor case thermo.  
8) Remove TD sensor fixed to the  
discharge pipe.  
Pipe cover, bundling band,  
9) Remove the compressor lead.  
(Leave the ferrite core attached to the  
electric parts box as it is.)  
each sensor (TL, TO, TE, TD, TTSS sseennssoorrss))  
PMV coil lead  
Black pipe cover for heat proof,  
bundling band for heat proof,  
each sensor (TL, TO, TE, TD, TS sensors)  
PMV coil lead  
Control P.C. board  
U : CN200  
V : CN201  
W : CN202  
Red  
White  
Black  
Control  
P.C. board  
(Tightening torque: 1.47 ± 0.1N•m)  
Comprressor  
lead  
Compressor lead  
Ferrite core  
– 159 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Compressor  
Compressor lead  
(Continued)  
10) Using a burner, remove the discharge  
pipe and the suction pipe connected to  
the compressor.  
6
Remove  
(Discharge pipe)  
Remove  
(Suction pipe)  
WARNING  
In case of removing the piping by broiling  
the welded part with a burner, if the piping  
includes oil, it may burst into flames at the  
moment when wax melted, so take  
sufficient care.  
CAUTION  
Note so that the flame does not catch the  
4-way valve and PMV.  
(An operation may become an error.)  
11) Pull off the discharge pipe and the  
suction pipe of the refrigerating cycle  
upward.  
Compressor bolt  
(3 pcs.)  
12) Remove the compressor bolts which fix  
the compressor to the bottom plate.  
(3 pcs.)  
13) Pull out the compressor toward you.  
X
CAUTIONX  
The weight of the compressor is 15kg or  
more, so handle it by 2 workers.  
– 160 –  
Compressor lead  
                                                                                                                                                                                                               
i
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  
n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   
d
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     
                                                                                                                                                                                                                        
h
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         
e
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           
f
                                                                                                                                                                                                                              
e
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               
r
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 
r
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  
itte  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     
c
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        
o
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          
r
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            
e
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             
W
t
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Compressor  
Compressor lead  
(Continued)  
2. Mounting of compressor  
6
1) Mount the compressor in the reverse  
procedure of removal.  
with the commpressor  
lead wire by 4 times.  
NOTES:  
Ferrite core  
After exchange of the compressor, be sure to  
exchange the compressor lead. (Repair part  
code of compressor lead: 43160591)  
0 to 50  
(Positiooning  
standard of  
compreessor  
lead wire)  
In this time, wrap the ferrite core with the  
compressor lead wire by 4 times.  
Using bundling band on the market, bind the  
compressor lead. As the compressor lead is  
long, be sure that the compressor lead does  
not contact with the discharge pipe.  
Using the bundling band on the market,  
fix the bundle at 2 positions.  
Pass the soundproof platee (outer wwinding)  
through betwween the ssuctionn ppipe and  
the accumulator.  
Fix the removed each sensor and PMV coil  
lead wire to the discharge pipe and the  
suction pipe with the bundling band via the  
pipe cover.  
Suctioon pipe  
Accumulator  
In this time, take note that each sensor and  
PMV coil lead wire do not come to contact  
with the discharge pipe and the reactor.  
(For fixing to the discharge pipe, use the  
black heat-proof pipe cover and the bundling  
band for heat-proof which is sold on the  
market.)  
Discharrge pipe  
Headeer pipe  
As shown in the right figure, mount the  
soundproof plate (inner winding, outer  
winding) by inserting between the compres-  
sor and the piping, and between piping and  
the partition plate.  
Pass the soundproof plate  
(inner windinng) thrrough  
betweeen commppressoor and  
discharrge pipee, suctiion pipe  
and thenn put itt on thee other  
side att thiss pposition.  
Put the compressor lead wire and the  
compressor case thermo between inner  
winding and outer winding of the soundproof  
as if dropping them in.  
Put the soundproof plate  
(outer winding) on the  
other side at this position.  
Soundproof plate  
(upper)  
Pipe cover, bundling band, TS sensor  
Discharrge pipe  
Soundproof plate  
(outer wwinding)  
Do not make clearance between  
the soundproof plate (upper) and  
the soundproof plate (outer winding).  
Black heat-proof pipe cover and  
heat-proof bundling band,  
each sensor (TL, TO, TE, TD, TS sensor)  
PMV coil lead wire  
Set each sensor so that it does not  
come to contact with the discharge pipe.  
Suction pipe  
PMV coil lead  
Pipe cover, bundling band,  
each sensor (TL, TO, TE, TS sensor)  
PMV coil lead  
– 161 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Compressor  
3. Vacuuming  
6
Compressor lead  
(Continued)  
1) Connect the vacuum pump to the charge  
port of the gas pipe valve and then drive  
the vacuum pump.  
2) Carry out vacuuming until the vacuum  
low pressure gauge indicates 1 (mmHg).  
NOTE:  
Before vacuuming, open PMV fully. If PMV is  
closed, vacuuming may be impossible between  
the liquid pipe valve and PMV of the outdoor unit.  
SW804  
SW801  
Forced full-opening method of PMV  
Turn on the leakage breaker.  
Turn on 1 and 3 of DIP SW804 on the control  
P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
Keep pushing SW801 on the control P.C. board  
of the outdoor unit for 1 second or more.  
After pushing SW801 for 1 second or more,  
turn off the leakage breaker within 2 minutes.  
4. Refrigerant charging  
1) Add the quantity of refrigerant specified  
by the pipe length into the charge port of  
the valve.  
PMV coil  
1. Detachment  
7
PMV coil  
1
3
1) Carry out works of 1 of  
and  
.
2) While pulling the coil upward and  
removing the spring which pinches the  
copper pipe, remove the coil from PMV  
main body.  
2. Attachment  
1) Match the spring to the copper pipe and  
fix it.  
Spring  
PMV main body  
– 162 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Fan guard  
3. Detachment  
8
Bell mouth  
Discharge port cabinet  
1
2
1) Carry out works of 1 of  
and  
.
CAUTION  
To prevent scratching on the product, handle  
the product on a cardboard or cloth.  
2) Remove the discharge port cabinet and  
then put on it so that the fan guard side  
directs downward.  
3) Remove the hooking claws (8 positions) of  
the fan guard.  
Fan guard  
Hooking claw  
2. Attachment  
1) Push the hooking claws (8 positions) with  
hands from the front side to fix the claws.  
CAUTIONX  
Check that all the hooking claws are fixed at  
the specified positions.  
– 163 –  
15. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST  
15-1. Indoor Unit  
15-1-1. RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E  
220  
206, 209  
208  
217  
208  
204  
232  
222  
216  
219  
205  
228  
201  
230  
204  
227  
229  
212  
214  
207  
207  
213  
213, 218, 224  
225, 226, 231  
236  
235  
234  
237  
233  
TEST  
SETTING  
C
ADR  
– 164 –  
Model Name RAV-SM  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
404SDT-E  
454SDT-E  
564SDT-E  
201  
203  
205  
206  
207  
208  
211  
212  
213  
214  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
4312C040 Motor, Fan  
43120227 Fan, Multi blade  
43170244 Hose, Drain  
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
4314J402 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
43122084 Case, Fan, Lower  
43122085 Case, Fan, Upper  
43100319 Plate, Inlet-B  
43172183 Pan Ass’y, Drain  
43149351 Socket  
43179129 Cap, Drain  
43170240 Hose, Drain  
43100321 Flange  
43049697 Bonnet  
43179135 Band, Hose  
43180327 Air Filter, ABS PP  
43079249 Band, Hose  
43196109 Bushing  
43047685 Nut, Flare, 1/4 IN  
43047688 Nut, Flare, 1/2 IN  
43149353 Socket, 1/2 IN  
43060029 Filter, Noise  
43151287 Switch, Float  
43100320 Plate, Inlet-A  
43177012 Pump, Drain, MDP-1401  
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN  
43019904 Holder, Sensor SUS  
431S8088 Owner’s Manual  
43166011 Remote controller, SX-A4EE  
43166004 Remote controller, SX-A11JE2  
43166006 Remote controller, WH-H1JE2  
43166012 Remote controller, SX-A5EE  
– 165 –  
<E-parts assembly>  
404  
403  
405  
401  
402  
Model Name RAV-SM  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
404SDT-E  
454SDT-E  
564SDT-E  
401  
402  
403  
404  
405  
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, Service TC (F6)  
43050426 Sensor, Service  
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
43160565 Terminal, Block, 3P, AC250V, 20A  
43160568 Terminal, 2P, AC30V/DC42V, 1A  
4316V368 P.C. Board Ass’y, 220–240V, MCC-1570  
– 166 –  
15-2. Outdoor Unit  
15-2-1. RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E  
11  
29  
2
16, 17  
18, 19  
4
31  
30  
12, 14  
10, 26, 32  
13, 15  
28  
33  
27  
6
3
21  
9
8
22  
25  
20  
30  
24  
7
5
1
– 167 –  
Model Name RAV-SP  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
404AT-E 404ATZ-E 404ATZG-E 454AT-E 454ATZ-E 454ATZG-E  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
43105042 Cabinet, Front, RoHs  
43105041 Cabinet, Upper  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43005698 Cabinet, Side, Right, RoHs  
43005672 Cabinet, Side, Left  
4301V035 Guard, Fan  
4301V053 Guard, Fin  
43100346 Base Ass’y, RoHs  
43119471 Caver, Valve, Packed  
43162055 Caver, Wiring Ass’y, RoHs  
Compressor, DA150A1F-20,  
10  
43041786  
RoHs  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11  
11  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
4314G246 Condenser Ass’y, RoHs  
4314G247 Condenser Ass’y, RoHs  
4314G248 Condenser Ass’y, RoHs  
37546845 Valve, Packed, 6.35  
43146680 Valve, Packed, 12.7  
43147196 Bonnet, 1/4 IN  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN  
43046444 Valve, 4-WAY, STF-0108Z  
Coil, Solenoid,  
43146722  
17  
1
1
1
1
1
1
STF-01A J502E1  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
43146695 Valve, Pulse, Modulating (PMV)  
37546849 Coil, PMV, CAM-MD12TF-6  
43055521 Reactor  
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
4302C068 Motor, Fan, ICF-140-43-4R  
43020329 Fan, Propeller, PJ421  
43047669 Nut, Flange  
43197164 Nut, Flange, SUS304-WSB  
43032441 Nipple, Drain  
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
43089160 Cap, Waterproof  
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal  
43063339 Holder, Sensor (TO)  
43049749 Rubber, Cushion  
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
43063321 Holder, Sensor, 4-8, 9.52  
43063322 Holder, Sensor, 6-11.4, 12.7  
43063325 Holder, Sensor, 6-6.35, 8  
43063317 Holder, Thermostat  
4314Q064 Muffler, 1/2  
– 168 –  
<Inverter assembly>  
705  
707  
707  
712  
710  
706  
711  
Model Name RAV-SP  
404AT-E 404ARZ-E 404ATZG-E 454AT-E 454ATZ-E 454ATZG-E  
Location  
Part No.  
No.  
Description  
701  
702  
703  
704  
705  
706  
707  
708  
710  
711  
712  
43050422 Sensor, TE  
43050423 Sensor, TS  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43050427 Sensor, TO  
43050430 Sensor, TD  
43062228 Base, P.C.board  
43160566 Terminal, Block 6P, 20A  
4316V293 P.C. Board Ass’y, SW, MCC-1530  
4316V367 P.C.board Ass’y, MCC-5009  
43160571 Fuse, Holder, 250V, 15A  
43160590 Fuse, AC250V, 6.3A  
43158192 Reactor  
– 169 –  
15-2-2. RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E  
– 170 –  
Model Name RAV-SP  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
564AT-E  
564ATZ-E  
564ATZG-E  
1
43105042 Cabinet, Front  
43105041 Cabinet, Upper  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
43005698 Cabinet, Side, Right  
43005672 Cabinet, Side, Left  
4301V088 Guard, Fan  
4
5
6
4301V053 Guard, Fin  
7
43100346 Base Ass’y  
8
43119471 Cover, Valve, Packed  
43162055 Cover, Wiring Ass’y  
43041644 Compressor, DA150A1F-21F  
4314Q064 Muffler  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
4314G281 Condenser Ass’y  
4314G282 Condenser Ass’y  
4314G283 Condenser Ass’y  
37546845 Valve, Packed, 6.35  
43146680 Valve, Packed, 12.7  
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
43147196 Bonnet, 1/4 IN  
43046445 Valve, 4-Way, STF-0213Z  
43146722 Coil, Solenoid, STF-01AJ502E1  
43146695 Valve, Pulse, Modulating, CAM-B30YGTF-2  
43046487 Coil, PMV, CAM-MD12TF-12  
43058277 Reactor, CH-57-Z-T  
4302C068 Motor, Fan, ICF-140-43-4R  
43020329 Fan, Propeller, PJ421  
43047669 Nut, Flange  
43197164 Nut, Flange  
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
43032441 Nipple, Drain  
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
43089160 Cap, Waterproof  
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal  
43063339 Holder, Sensor TO  
43042485 Rubber, Cushion  
43063321 Holder, Sensor  
43063322 Holder, Sensor  
43063325 Holder, Sensor  
43063317 Holder, Thermostat  
43107256 Plate, Fix, Valve, Packed  
4301V080 Plate, Fix, Valve, Packed  
43148205 Accumulator Ass’y  
43148214 Accumulator Ass’y  
43039392 Base, Motor  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43039394 Base, Motor  
– 171 –  
<Inverter assembly>  
Model Name RAV-SP  
Location  
Part No.  
No.  
Description  
564AT-E  
564ATZ-E  
564ATZG-E  
701  
702  
703  
704  
705  
706  
707  
708  
710  
711  
712  
43050422 Sensor, TE  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43050423 Sensor, TS  
43050427 Sensor, TO  
43050430 Sensor, TD  
43062228 Base, P.C.board  
43160566 Terminal block, 6P, 20A  
4316V293 P.C. board Ass’y, SW, MCC-1530  
4316V384 P.C. board Ass’y, MCC-5009  
43160571 Fuse, Holder, 15A, 250V  
43160590 Fuse, 6.3A, 250V AC  
43158192 Reactor, CH-43-Z-T  
– 172 –  
15-2-3. RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E  
13  
24  
19  
20  
30, 31, 32  
5
33  
15  
7, 38  
23  
35  
28, 29  
4, 26  
22  
34  
3
17  
9, 10, 36  
6, 27  
8, 39, 40  
14  
21  
25, 37  
16  
11  
18  
1
2
12  
– 173 –  
Model Name RAV-SP  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
804AT-E  
804ATZ-E  
804ATZG-E  
1
43019904 Holder, Sensor  
43032441 Nipple, Drain  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
43041798 Compressor, DA220A2F-22L  
43046493 Coil, PMV, CAM-MD12TF-15  
43046451 Valve, 4-Way, STF-0218G  
43047246 Bonnet, 3/8 IN  
4
5
6
7
43047669 Nut, Flange  
8
43049739 Cushion, Rubber  
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal  
43063317 Holder, Thermostat  
43100437 Panel, Front, Piping  
43100438 Panel, Back, Piping  
43100440 Plate, Roof  
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
43100452 Panel, Side  
43100453 Panel, Air outlet  
43100454 Panel, Flont  
43100455 Base Ass’y  
43107276 Hanger  
43107277 Guard, Fin, Back  
43107278 Guard, Fin, Side  
43109422 Guard, Fan  
43120224 Fan, propeller, PB521  
43122113 Bell mouth  
4312C042 Motor, Fan, ICF-280-A60-1  
43146686 Valve, Packed, 9.52  
43146695 Valve, Pulse, Modulating, CAM-B30YGTF-2  
43146724 Valve, Ball, SBV-JA5GTC-1  
43148232 Accumulator, Ass’y, 1.8L  
43148233 Accumulator, Ass’y, 1.8L  
4314G278 Condenser Ass’y  
4314G279 Condenser Ass’y  
4314G280 Condenser Ass’y  
4314N024 Coil, Valve, 4-Way, VHV-01AP552B1  
4314Q031 Strainer, DIA 9.52  
4314Q056 Strainer, DIA 25.4  
43160591 Lead Ass’y, compressor  
43194029 Bonnet  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43197164 Nut, Flange  
43197183 Bolt, Compressor  
43197184 Bolt, Compressor  
3
3
3
– 174 –  
<Inverter assembly>  
709, 710  
711  
704  
707  
706  
708  
705  
1 2 3  
703  
702  
701  
712  
713  
Model Name RAV-SP  
Location  
Part No.  
No.  
Description  
804AT-E  
804ATZ-E  
804ATZG-E  
701  
702  
703  
704  
705  
706  
707  
708  
709  
710  
711  
712  
713  
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, Ø6  
43063325 Holder, Sensor (TE)  
43150319 Sensor Ass’y, Ø4  
43155188 Reactor, CH-56-2Z-T  
43160565 Terminal block, 3P, 20A  
43160581 Termonal,3P, 60A  
43160589 Fuse, 10A, 250V AC  
43163055 Holder, Sensor (TO)  
43163059 Spacer, Bush  
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43163060 Spacer, Collar  
4316V387 P.C.board Ass’y, MCC-1571  
43063322 Holder, Sensor (TS)  
43063321 Holder, Sensor (TD)  
– 175 –  
WARNINGS ON REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE  
Important  
Check of Concentration Limit  
The room in which the air conditioner is to be  
installed requires a design that in the event of  
refrigerant gas leaking out, its concentration will  
not exceed a set limit.  
NOTE 2 :  
The standards for minimum room volume are as follows.  
1) No partition (shaded portion)  
The refrigerant R410A which is used in the air  
conditioner is safe, without the toxicity or combustibility of  
ammonia, and is not restricted by laws to be imposed  
which protect the ozone layer. However, since it contains  
more than air, it poses the risk of suffocation if its  
concentration should rise excessively. Suffocation from  
leakage of R410A is almost non-existent. With the recent  
increase in the number of high concentration buildings,  
however, the installation of multi air conditioner systems  
is on the increase because of the need for effective use  
of floor space, individual control, energy conservation by  
curtailing heat and carrying power etc.  
Most importantly, the multi air conditioner system is able  
to replenish a large amount of refrigerant compared with  
conventional individual air conditioners. If a single unit of  
the multi conditioner system is to be installed in a small  
room, select a suitable model and installation procedure  
so that if the refrigerant accidentally leaks out, its  
concentration does not reach the limit (and in the event  
of an emergency, measures can be made before injury  
can occur).  
2) When there is an effective opening with the adjacent  
room for ventilation of leaking refrigerant gas (opening  
without a door, or an opening 0.15% or larger than the  
respective floor spaces at the top or bottom of the door).  
Outdoor unit  
Refrigerant piping  
Indoor unit  
3) If an indoor unit is installed in each partitioned room  
and the refrigerant piping is interconnected, the  
smallest room of course becomes the object.  
In a room where the concentration may exceed the limit,  
create an opening with adjacent rooms, or install  
mechanical ventilation combined with a gas leak  
detection device.  
But when a mechanical ventilation is installed  
interlocked with a gas leakage detector in the smallest  
room where the density limit is exceeded, the volume  
of the next smallest room becomes the object.  
The concentration is as given below.  
Total amount of refrigerant (kg)  
Min. volume of the indoor unit installed room (m³)  
Concentration limit (kg/m³)  
Refrigerant piping  
Outdoor unit  
The concentration limit of R410A which is used in multi  
air conditioners is 0.3kg/m³.  
Very  
small  
Indoor unit  
room  
Small  
room  
Medium  
room  
Large room  
Mechanical ventilation device - Gas leak detector  
NOTE 1 :  
If there are 2 or more refrigerating systems in a single  
refrigerating device, the amounts of refrigerant should be  
as charged in each independent device.  
NOTE 3 :  
The minimum indoor floor area compared with the  
amount of refrigerant is roughly as follows:  
(When the ceiling is 2.7m high)  
Outdoor unit  
e.g., charged  
e.g.,  
amount (10kg)  
charged amount (15kg)  
40  
Range below the  
35  
m²  
density limit  
of 0.3 kg/m³  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
(countermeasures  
not needed)  
Room A Room B Room C Room D Room E Room F  
Indoor unit  
Range above  
the density limit  
of 0.3 kg/m³  
(countermeasures  
needed)  
For the amount of charge in this example:  
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in  
rooms A, B and C is 10kg.  
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in  
rooms D, E and F is 15kg.  
0
10  
20  
30  
Total amount of refrigerant  
kg  
TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION  
23-17, TAKANAWA 3 CHOME, MINATOKU, TOKYO, 108-8580, JAPAN  
Copyright © 2008 TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION, ALL Rights Reserved.  

Mitsubishi Electronics Msh 09nv User Manual
Samsung Sf 560 User Manual
Samsung Aq12sbge User Manual
Sanyo Cl2432a User Manual
Sanyo Xms1272 User Manual
Soleus Air Sg Wac 15ese User Manual
Sunpentown Intl Wa 1010h User Manual
Trion Air Boss Dc 12 User Manual
Whirlpool Acp102pr0 User Manual
York Sunline 2000 D2ee 036 User Manual